*** empty log message ***
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8
NC
4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set I960
0285c67d 28@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 29@set M68K
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
252b5132
RH
42@ifinfo
43@format
44START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
46END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47@end format
48@end ifinfo
49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
0e9517a9 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9c8ebd6a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
903249d7 962002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
147@ifset M68HC11
148* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
159@ifset SPU
160* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
162@ifset TICOFF
163* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
165@ifset WIN32
166* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
168@ifset XTENSA
169* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170@end ifset
252b5132
RH
171@end ifclear
172@ifclear SingleFormat
173* BFD:: BFD
174@end ifclear
175@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 179* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 180* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 181@end menu
84ec0e6d 182@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
183
184@node Overview
185@chapter Overview
186
187@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 189
0879a67a 190@ifset man
0285c67d 191@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 192ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
193@c man end
194
195@c man begin SEEALSO
196ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198@file{ld}.
199@c man end
200@end ifset
201
202@c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 205their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 206compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
209a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
0285c67d
NC
212@ifset man
213@c For the man only
ece2d90e 214This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
215@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
217@end ifset
218
252b5132 219@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
220This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
222write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225@end ifclear
226
227Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 230@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
231(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
0285c67d
NC
233@c man end
234
252b5132
RH
235@node Invocation
236@chapter Invocation
237
0285c67d
NC
238@c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
ff5dcc92 240The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
241and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man end
245
252b5132
RH
246@ifset UsesEnvVars
247@menu
248* Options:: Command Line Options
249* Environment:: Environment Variables
250@end menu
251
252@node Options
253@section Command Line Options
254@end ifset
255
256@cindex command line
257@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
258
259@c man begin OPTIONS
260
252b5132
RH
261The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 264For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
265object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268@smallexample
269ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270@end smallexample
271
ff5dcc92 272This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
273result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
ff5dcc92 277Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
278point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
283occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285noted in the descriptions below.
286
287@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
288Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
292
293Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297message @samp{No input files}.
298
36f63dca 299If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
300assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
305@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
310
311For options whose names are a single letter,
312option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314option that requires them.
315
316For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 317precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 318@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 319this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 320only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
321@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323output.
324
325Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330accepted.
252b5132 331
36f63dca
NC
332Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
334prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
336
337@smallexample
2509a395 338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
339@end smallexample
340
341This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
342silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349@smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
352
353Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354linker:
355
ff5dcc92 356@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 357@include at-file.texi
dff70155 358
2509a395
SL
359@kindex -a @var{keyword}
360@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
361This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
7ee314fa
AM
367@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
368@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
370@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
371specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
372will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
373finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
374it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
375This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
376interface.
377
252b5132
RH
378@ifset I960
379@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
380@kindex -A @var{arch}
381@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
382@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
383@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
384In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
385Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
386@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
387the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 388archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
389family}, for details.
390
ff5dcc92 391Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
392other architecture families.
393@end ifset
394
395@ifclear SingleFormat
396@cindex binary input format
397@kindex -b @var{format}
398@kindex --format=@var{format}
399@cindex input format
400@cindex input format
401@item -b @var{input-format}
402@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
403@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
404file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 405@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 406that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 407configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 408to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
409default input format the most usual format on each machine.
410@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
411supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
412formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
413@xref{BFD}.
414
415You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
416binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
417linking object files of different formats), by including
418@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 419particular format.
252b5132
RH
420
421The default format is taken from the environment variable
422@code{GNUTARGET}.
423@ifset UsesEnvVars
424@xref{Environment}.
425@end ifset
426You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
427@code{TARGET};
428@ifclear man
429see @ref{Format Commands}.
430@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
431@end ifclear
432
433@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
434@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@cindex compatibility, MRI
436@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
437@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 438For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 439files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
440@ifclear man
441@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
442@end ifclear
443@ifset man
444the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
445@end ifset
446Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 447the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
448scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
449If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
450specified by any @samp{-L} options.
451
452@cindex common allocation
453@kindex -d
454@kindex -dc
455@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 456@item -d
252b5132
RH
457@itemx -dc
458@itemx -dp
459These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
460compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
461even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
462script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
463@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
464
7ee314fa
AM
465@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
466@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
467@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
470@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
471specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
472will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
473option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
474The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
475
252b5132
RH
476@cindex entry point, from command line
477@kindex -e @var{entry}
478@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 479@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
480@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
481Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
482program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
483named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
484and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
485base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
486@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
487and other ways of specifying the entry point.
488
b58f81ae
DJ
489@kindex --exclude-libs
490@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
491Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 492exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
493@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
494automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
495port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
496explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
497option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
498be treated as hidden.
499
e1c37eb5
DK
500@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
501@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
502Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
503should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
504into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
505may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
506used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
507the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
508match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
509command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
510of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
511regardless of this option.
512
252b5132
RH
513@cindex dynamic symbol table
514@kindex -E
515@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 516@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
517@item -E
518@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
519@itemx --no-export-dynamic
520When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
521option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
522all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
523set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
524
525If you do not use either of these options (or use the
526@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
527dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
528referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
529
530If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
531back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
532dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
533linking the program itself.
534
55255dae 535You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 536be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 537See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 538
8b747e1a
DK
539Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
540support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
541the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
542
36f63dca 543@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
544@cindex big-endian objects
545@cindex endianness
546@kindex -EB
547@item -EB
548Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
549
550@cindex little-endian objects
551@kindex -EL
552@item -EL
553Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 554@end ifclear
252b5132 555
2509a395
SL
556@kindex -f @var{name}
557@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
558@item -f @var{name}
559@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
560When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
561to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
562table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
563symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
564
565If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
566run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
567the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
568first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
569@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
570in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
571Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
572implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
573machine specific performance.
574
575This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
576will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
577
2509a395
SL
578@kindex -F @var{name}
579@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 580@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 581@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
582When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
583the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
584of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
585on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
586
587If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
588run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
589dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
590filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
591found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
592used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
593@var{name}.
594
ff5dcc92 595Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 596toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
597object files.
598@ifclear SingleFormat
599The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 600@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 601@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
602environment variable.
603@end ifclear
604The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
605creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 606
3dbf70a2 607@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
608@kindex -fini=@var{name}
609@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
610When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
611executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
612address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
613the function to call.
614
252b5132
RH
615@kindex -g
616@item -g
617Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
618
2509a395
SL
619@kindex -G @var{value}
620@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 621@cindex object size
2509a395 622@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
623@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
624Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
625@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
626MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
627sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
628
629@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 630@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 631@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 632@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
633@itemx -soname=@var{name}
634When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
635the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
636which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
637linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
638field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
639
640@kindex -i
641@cindex incremental link
642@item -i
643Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
644
3dbf70a2 645@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
646@kindex -init=@var{name}
647@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
648When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
649executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
650of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
651function to call.
652
252b5132 653@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 654@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 655@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 656@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
657@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
658Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
659list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
660If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 661will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 662will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 663
ff5dcc92 664On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
665files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
666and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
667called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
668@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
669indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
670to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
671@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
672
673The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
674specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
675was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
676command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
677archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
678the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
679
ff5dcc92 680See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
681archives multiple times.
682
683You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
684
685@ifset GENERIC
686This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 687if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
688behaviour of the AIX linker.
689@end ifset
690
691@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 692@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 693@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 694@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 695@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
696Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
697for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
698option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
699in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
700on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 701@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
702order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
703how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
704option is specified.
252b5132 705
9c8ebd6a
DJ
706If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
707by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
708
252b5132
RH
709@ifset UsesEnvVars
710The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 711@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
712some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
713@end ifset
714
715The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
716@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
717at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
718
719@cindex emulation
720@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 721@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
722Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
723emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
724
725If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
726@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
727
728Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
729configured.
730
731@cindex link map
732@kindex -M
733@kindex --print-map
734@item -M
735@itemx --print-map
736Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
737information about the link, including the following:
738
739@itemize @bullet
740@item
3b83e13a 741Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
742@item
743How common symbols are allocated.
744@item
745All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
746which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
747@item
748The values assigned to symbols.
749
750Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
751involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
752have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
753linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
754of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
755the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
756linker script containing:
757
758@smallexample
759 foo = 1
760 foo = foo * 4
761 foo = foo + 8
762@end smallexample
763
764will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
765option is used:
766
767@smallexample
768 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
769 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
771@end smallexample
772
773See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
774scripts.
252b5132
RH
775@end itemize
776
777@kindex -n
778@cindex read-only text
779@cindex NMAGIC
780@kindex --nmagic
781@item -n
782@itemx --nmagic
fa19fce0 783Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
a1ab1d2a 784@code{NMAGIC} if possible.
252b5132
RH
785
786@kindex -N
787@kindex --omagic
788@cindex read/write from cmd line
789@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 790@item -N
252b5132
RH
791@itemx --omagic
792Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
793not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
794libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
795mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
796is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
797specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
798
799@kindex --no-omagic
800@cindex OMAGIC
801@item --no-omagic
802This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
803sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
804be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
805shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
806
807@kindex -o @var{output}
808@kindex --output=@var{output}
809@cindex naming the output file
810@item -o @var{output}
811@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 812Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
813option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
814script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
815
816@kindex -O @var{level}
817@cindex generating optimized output
818@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 819If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 820the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
821should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
822option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
823the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
824no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
825of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 826
a712da20
NC
827@kindex -q
828@kindex --emit-relocs
829@cindex retain relocations in final executable
830@item -q
831@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 832Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
833Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
834order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
835in larger executables.
836
dbab7a7b
NC
837This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
838
4f471f39
RS
839@kindex --force-dynamic
840@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
841@item --force-dynamic
842Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
843to VxWorks targets.
844
252b5132
RH
845@cindex partial link
846@cindex relocatable output
847@kindex -r
1049f94e 848@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 849@item -r
1049f94e 850@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 851Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 852turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
853linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
854magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
855@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 856@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
857If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
858linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
859constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
860
62bf86b4
HPN
861When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
862partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
863relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
864example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
865with input files in other formats at all.
866
252b5132
RH
867This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
868
869@kindex -R @var{file}
870@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
871@cindex symbol-only input
872@item -R @var{filename}
873@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
874Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
875relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
876to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
877programs. You may use this option more than once.
878
ff5dcc92 879For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 880followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 881the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
882
883@kindex -s
884@kindex --strip-all
885@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 886@item -s
252b5132
RH
887@itemx --strip-all
888Omit all symbol information from the output file.
889
890@kindex -S
891@kindex --strip-debug
892@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 893@item -S
252b5132
RH
894@itemx --strip-debug
895Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
896
897@kindex -t
898@kindex --trace
899@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 900@item -t
252b5132 901@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 902Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
903
904@kindex -T @var{script}
905@kindex --script=@var{script}
906@cindex script files
907@item -T @var{scriptfile}
908@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
909Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 910@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 911@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
912output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
913the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
914specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
915options accumulate.
252b5132 916
14be8564
L
917@kindex -dT @var{script}
918@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
919@cindex script files
920@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
921@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
922Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
923
924This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
925processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
926command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
927@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
928behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
929command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
930the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
931@samp{gcc}).
932
252b5132
RH
933@kindex -u @var{symbol}
934@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
935@cindex undefined symbol
936@item -u @var{symbol}
937@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
938Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
939symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
940modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
941different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
942option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
943
944@kindex -Ur
945@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 946@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
947For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
948@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 949turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
950@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
951It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
952with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
953be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
954@samp{-r} for the others.
955
577a0623
AM
956@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
957@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
958Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
959@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
960missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
961specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
962multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
963input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
964in a linker script.
a854a4a7 965
252b5132
RH
966@kindex -v
967@kindex -V
968@kindex --version
969@cindex version
970@item -v
971@itemx --version
972@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 973Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
974lists the supported emulations.
975
976@kindex -x
977@kindex --discard-all
978@cindex deleting local symbols
979@item -x
980@itemx --discard-all
981Delete all local symbols.
982
983@kindex -X
984@kindex --discard-locals
985@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 986@item -X
252b5132 987@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
988Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
989system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
990or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
991
992@kindex -y @var{symbol}
993@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
994@cindex symbol tracing
995@item -y @var{symbol}
996@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
997Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
998option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
999to prepend an underscore.
1000
1001This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1002don't know where the reference is coming from.
1003
1004@kindex -Y @var{path}
1005@item -Y @var{path}
1006Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1007for Solaris compatibility.
1008
1009@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1010@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1011The recognized keywords are:
1012@table @samp
1013
1014@item combreloc
1015Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1016lookup caching possible.
1017
1018@item defs
560e09e9 1019Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1020shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1021
6aa29e7b
JJ
1022@item execstack
1023Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1024
cd6d6c15
NC
1025@item initfirst
1026This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1027It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1028before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1029the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1030the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1031objects.
1032
1033@item interpose
1034Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1035but the primary executable.
1036
5fa222e4
AM
1037@item lazy
1038When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1039dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1040the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1041Lazy binding is the default.
1042
cd6d6c15
NC
1043@item loadfltr
1044Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1045runtime.
1046
1047@item muldefs
1048Allows multiple definitions.
1049
1050@item nocombreloc
1051Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1052
1053@item nocopyreloc
1054Disables production of copy relocs.
1055
1056@item nodefaultlib
1057Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1058ignore any default library search paths.
1059
1060@item nodelete
1061Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1062
1063@item nodlopen
1064Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1065
1066@item nodump
1067Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1068
6aa29e7b
JJ
1069@item noexecstack
1070Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1071
1072@item norelro
1073Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1074
cd6d6c15
NC
1075@item now
1076When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1077dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1078when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1079deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1080first called.
1081
1082@item origin
1083Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1084
6aa29e7b
JJ
1085@item relro
1086Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1087
24718e3b
L
1088@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1089Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1090
1091@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1092Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1093
cd6d6c15
NC
1094@end table
1095
ece2d90e 1096Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1097
1098@kindex -(
1099@cindex groups of archives
1100@item -( @var{archives} -)
1101@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1102The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1103either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1104
1105The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1106references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1107the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1108archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1109object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1110would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1111they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1112resolved.
1113
1114Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1115it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1116more archives.
1117
69da35b5
NC
1118@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1119@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1120@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1121@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1122Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1123recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1124and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1125the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1126behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1127so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1128restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1129
4a43e768
AM
1130@kindex --as-needed
1131@kindex --no-as-needed
1132@item --as-needed
1133@itemx --no-as-needed
1134This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1135on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1136the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1137on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31
NC
1138needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1139emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1140from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1141DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1142undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1143@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1144
e56f61be
L
1145@kindex --add-needed
1146@kindex --no-add-needed
1147@item --add-needed
1148@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1149These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1150their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1151options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1152and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1153
252b5132
RH
1154@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1155@item -assert @var{keyword}
1156This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1157
1158@kindex -Bdynamic
1159@kindex -dy
1160@kindex -call_shared
1161@item -Bdynamic
1162@itemx -dy
1163@itemx -call_shared
1164Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1165for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1166default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1167for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1168multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1169@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1170
a1ab1d2a
UD
1171@kindex -Bgroup
1172@item -Bgroup
1173Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1174section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1175object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1176@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1177only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1178
252b5132
RH
1179@kindex -Bstatic
1180@kindex -dn
1181@kindex -non_shared
1182@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1183@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1184@itemx -dn
1185@itemx -non_shared
1186@itemx -static
1187Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1188platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1189variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1190may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1191library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1192option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1193option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1194shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1195references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1196libraries.
252b5132
RH
1197
1198@kindex -Bsymbolic
1199@item -Bsymbolic
1200When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1201definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1202for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1203within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1204platforms which support shared libraries.
1205
40b36307
L
1206@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1207@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1208When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1209symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1210This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1211libraries.
1212
55255dae
L
1213@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1214@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1215Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1216typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1217global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1218within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1219to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1220in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1221which support shared libraries.
1222
1223The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1224scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1225
40b36307
L
1226@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1227@item --dynamic-list-data
1228Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1229
1230@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1231@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1232Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1233is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1234
0b8a70d9
L
1235@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1236@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1237Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1238
252b5132
RH
1239@kindex --check-sections
1240@kindex --no-check-sections
1241@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1242@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1243Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1244been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1245perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1246suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1247allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1248restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1249Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1250force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1251option.
252b5132 1252
ddbb8a31
NC
1253@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1254@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1255@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1256@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1257This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1258by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1259command line. Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1260output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1261input dynamic library. With @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}
1262specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1263follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries ignored. The default
1264behaviour can be restored with @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1265
1266This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1267libraries. With the default setting dynamic libraries mentioned on
1268the command line will be recursively searched, following their
1269DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1270required by the output binary. With
1271@option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries} specified however the searching
1272of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the dynamic
1273library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1274symbols.
1275
252b5132
RH
1276@cindex cross reference table
1277@kindex --cref
1278@item --cref
1279Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1280generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1281Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1282
1283The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1284easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1285sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1286symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1287definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1288
4818e05f
AM
1289@cindex common allocation
1290@kindex --no-define-common
1291@item --no-define-common
1292This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1293The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1294@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1295
1296The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1297the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1298of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1299forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1300Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1301from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1302This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1303and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1304duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1305paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1306
252b5132 1307@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1308@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1309@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1310Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1311address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1312times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1313limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1314context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1315symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1316constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1317using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1318Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1319space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1320@var{expression}.
1321
1322@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1323@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1324@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1325@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1326@itemx --no-demangle
1327These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1328and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1329present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1330underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1331mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1332different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1333to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1334demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1335is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1336
1337@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1338@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1339@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1340@item -I@var{file}
1341@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1342Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1343generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1344linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1345doing.
1346
7ce691ae 1347@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1348@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1349@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1350@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1351Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1352with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1353
252b5132
RH
1354@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1355@item --force-exe-suffix
1356Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1357
1358If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1359@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1360the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1361option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1362Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1363it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1364
1365@kindex --gc-sections
1366@kindex --no-gc-sections
1367@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1368@item --gc-sections
1369@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1370Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1371targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1372performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1373@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1374
d5465ba2
AM
1375@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1376examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1377symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1378command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1379referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1380libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1381referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1382the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1383relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1384
ac69cbc6
TG
1385This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1386@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1387specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1388a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1389
c17d87de
NC
1390@kindex --print-gc-sections
1391@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1392@cindex garbage collection
1393@item --print-gc-sections
1394@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1395List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1396printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1397collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1398default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1399be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1400line.
1401
252b5132
RH
1402@cindex help
1403@cindex usage
1404@kindex --help
1405@item --help
1406Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1407
ea20a7da
CC
1408@kindex --target-help
1409@item --target-help
1410Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1411
2509a395
SL
1412@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1413@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1414Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1415@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1416
1417@cindex memory usage
1418@kindex --no-keep-memory
1419@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1420@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1421symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1422instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1423necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1424while linking a large executable.
1425
1426@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1427@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1428@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1429@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1430Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1431is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1432The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1433behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1434libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1435
aa713662
L
1436@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1437@kindex -z muldefs
1438@item --allow-multiple-definition
1439@itemx -z muldefs
1440Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1441report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1442first definition will be used.
1443
b79e8c78 1444@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1445@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1446@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1447@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1448Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1449This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1450determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1451shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1452how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1453
903249d7
NC
1454The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1455referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1456an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1457a shared library.
1458
1459The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1460libraries specified at link time are that:
1461
1462@itemize @bullet
1463@item
1464A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1465that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1466resolvable at load time.
1467@item
1468There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1469symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1470
1471The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1472select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1473architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1474appropriate memset function.
1475@end itemize
b79e8c78 1476
31941635
L
1477@kindex --no-undefined-version
1478@item --no-undefined-version
1479Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1480it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1481will be issued instead.
1482
3e3b46e5
PB
1483@kindex --default-symver
1484@item --default-symver
1485Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1486exported symbols.
1487
1488@kindex --default-imported-symver
1489@item --default-imported-symver
1490Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1491imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1492
252b5132
RH
1493@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1494@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1495Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1496files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1497been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1498This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1499errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1500have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1501inappropriate.
1502
fe7929ce
AM
1503@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1504@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1505Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1506library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1507
252b5132
RH
1508@kindex --no-whole-archive
1509@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1510Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1511archive files.
1512
1513@cindex output file after errors
1514@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1515@item --noinhibit-exec
1516Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1517Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1518errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1519when it issues any error whatsoever.
1520
0a9c1c8e
CD
1521@kindex -nostdlib
1522@item -nostdlib
1523Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1524command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1525(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1526
252b5132 1527@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1528@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1529@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1530@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1531file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1532@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1533object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1534object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1535should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1536usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1537name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1538list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1539command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1540this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1541@end ifclear
1542
36af4a4e
JJ
1543@kindex -pie
1544@kindex --pic-executable
1545@item -pie
1546@itemx --pic-executable
1547@cindex position independent executables
1548Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1549ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1550libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1551address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1552normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1553defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1554
252b5132
RH
1555@kindex -qmagic
1556@item -qmagic
1557This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1558
1559@kindex -Qy
1560@item -Qy
1561This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1562
1563@kindex --relax
1564@cindex synthesizing linker
1565@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1566@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1567@item --relax
28d5f677 1568@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1569An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1570@ifset GENERIC
1571This option is only supported on a few targets.
1572@end ifset
1573@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1574@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1575@end ifset
1576@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1577@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1578@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1579@ifset XTENSA
1580@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1581@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1582@ifset M68HC11
1583@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1584@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1585@ifset POWERPC
1586@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1587@end ifset
252b5132 1588
28d5f677
NC
1589On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1590global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1591addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1592synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1593instructions, and combinig constant values.
252b5132
RH
1594
1595On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1596debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1597@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1598This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1599family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1600@end ifset
1601
1602@ifset GENERIC
1603On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1604but ignored.
1605@end ifset
1606
28d5f677
NC
1607On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1608@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1609
252b5132
RH
1610@cindex retaining specified symbols
1611@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1612@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1613@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1614@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1615Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1616discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1617symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1618@ifset GENERIC
1619(such as VxWorks)
1620@end ifset
1621where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1622run-time memory.
1623
1624@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1625or symbols needed for relocations.
1626
1627You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1628line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1629
1630@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1631@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1632@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1633@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1634Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1635linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1636arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1637them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1638also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1639objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1640@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1641ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1642@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1643
ff5dcc92 1644The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1645SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1646@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1647runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1648options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1649gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1650file systems.
252b5132 1651
ff5dcc92 1652For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1653followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1654the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1655@end ifset
1656
1657@ifset GENERIC
1658@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1659@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1660@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1661When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1662happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1663of the input files.
1664
1665When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1666non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1667shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1668explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1669specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1670@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1671either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1672appearing multiple times.
1673
28c309a2
NC
1674This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1675that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1676is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1677runtime linker would do.
1678
252b5132 1679The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1680libraries:
252b5132
RH
1681@enumerate
1682@item
ff5dcc92 1683Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1684@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1685Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1686between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1687specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1688used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1689at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1690by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1691the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1692@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1693On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1694@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1695environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1696@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1697On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1698directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1699@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1700For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1701variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1702@item
ec4eb78a
L
1703For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1704@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1705libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1706@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1707@item
252b5132
RH
1708The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1709@item
1710For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1711exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1712@end enumerate
1713
1714If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1715warning and continue with the link.
1716@end ifset
1717
1718@kindex -shared
1719@kindex -Bshareable
1720@item -shared
1721@itemx -Bshareable
1722@cindex shared libraries
1723Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1724and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1725shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1726undefined symbols in the link.
1727
252b5132 1728@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1729@item --sort-common
1730@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1731@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1732This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1733ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1734sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1735eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1736between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1737specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1738
2509a395
SL
1739@kindex --sort-section=name
1740@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1741This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1742patterns in the linker script.
1743
2509a395
SL
1744@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1745@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1746This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1747patterns in the linker script.
1748
252b5132 1749@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1750@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1751Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1752each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1753size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1754
1755@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1756@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1757Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1758output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1759This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1760certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1761cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1762that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1763support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1764input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1765more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1766many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1767
1768@kindex --stats
1769@item --stats
1770Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1771as execution time and memory usage.
1772
2509a395 1773@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1774@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1775Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1776configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1777that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1778
252b5132
RH
1779@kindex --traditional-format
1780@cindex traditional format
1781@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1782For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1783the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1784use the traditional format instead.
1785
1786@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1787For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1788symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1789full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1790@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1791trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1792combine duplicate entries.
1793
2509a395
SL
1794@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1795@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1796Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1797address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1798times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1799line.
1800@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1801for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1802@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1803should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1804sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1805
2509a395
SL
1806@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1807@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1808@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1809@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1810@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1811@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1812@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1813Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1814@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1815
2509a395
SL
1816@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1817@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1818@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1819When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1820of the first byte of the text segment.
1821
560e09e9
NC
1822@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1823@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1824Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1825values for @samp{method}:
1826
1827@table @samp
1828@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1829Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1830
1831@item report-all
da8bce14 1832Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1833
1834@item ignore-in-object-files
1835Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1836ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1837
1838@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1839Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1840ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1841when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1842libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1843command line.
1844@end table
1845
1846The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1847by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1848
1849Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1850unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1851can change this to a warning.
1852
252b5132
RH
1853@kindex --verbose
1854@cindex verbose
1855@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1856@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1857Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1858supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1859the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1860
1861@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1862@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1863@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1864Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1865used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1866about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1867is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1868see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1869use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1870symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1871@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1872
7ce691ae 1873@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1874@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1875@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1876@item --warn-common
1877Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1878a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1879but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1880you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1881Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1882warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1883
1884There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1885
1886@table @samp
1887@item int i = 1;
1888A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1889file.
1890
1891@item extern int i;
1892An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1893There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1894variable somewhere.
1895
1896@item int i;
1897A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1898variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1899The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1900single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1901size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1902a definition of the same variable.
1903@end table
1904
1905The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1906Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1907just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1908encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1909a common symbol.
1910
1911@enumerate
1912@item
1913Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1914definition for the symbol.
1915@smallexample
1916@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1917 overridden by definition
1918@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1919@end smallexample
1920
1921@item
1922Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1923the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1924except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1925@smallexample
1926@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1927 overriding common
1928@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1929@end smallexample
1930
1931@item
1932Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1933@smallexample
1934@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1935 of `@var{symbol}'
1936@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1937@end smallexample
1938
1939@item
1940Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1941@smallexample
1942@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1943 overridden by larger common
1944@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1945@end smallexample
1946
1947@item
1948Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1949the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1950encountered in a different order.
1951@smallexample
1952@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1953 overriding smaller common
1954@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1955@end smallexample
1956@end enumerate
1957
1958@kindex --warn-constructors
1959@item --warn-constructors
1960Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1961object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1962detect the use of global constructors.
1963
1964@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1965@item --warn-multiple-gp
1966Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1967This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1968Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1969section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1970of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1971base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1972base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1973bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1974large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1975values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1976option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1977
1978@kindex --warn-once
1979@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1980@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1981@item --warn-once
1982Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1983which refers to it.
1984
1985@kindex --warn-section-align
1986@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1987@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1988@item --warn-section-align
1989Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1990alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1991The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1992is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1993the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1994
8fdd7217
NC
1995@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1996@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1997Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1998
a0c402a5
L
1999@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2000@item --warn-alternate-em
2001Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2002
560e09e9
NC
2003@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2004@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2005If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2006@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2007This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2008
2009@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2010@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2011This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2012it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2013
252b5132
RH
2014@kindex --whole-archive
2015@cindex including an entire archive
2016@item --whole-archive
2017For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2018@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2019in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2020files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2021library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2022library. This option may be used more than once.
2023
7ec229ce 2024Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2025about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2026Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2027list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2028your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2029
2509a395
SL
2030@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2031@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2032Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2033@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2034undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2035@var{symbol}.
2036
2037This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2038wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2039wishes to call the system function, it should call
2040@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2041
2042Here is a trivial example:
2043
2044@smallexample
2045void *
cc2f008e 2046__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2047@{
cc2f008e 2048 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2049 return __real_malloc (c);
2050@}
2051@end smallexample
2052
ff5dcc92 2053If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2054all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2055instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2056call the real @code{malloc} function.
2057
2058You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2059links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2060you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2061file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2062call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2063
6aa29e7b
JJ
2064@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2065@item --eh-frame-hdr
2066Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2067@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2068
6c1439be
L
2069@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2070@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2071@item --enable-new-dtags
2072@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2073This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2074systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2075@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2076If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2077created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2078those options are only available for ELF systems.
2079
2d643429 2080@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2081@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2082Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2083close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2084time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2085increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2086value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2087
fdc90cb4
JJ
2088@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2089@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2090Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2091@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2092new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2093the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2094hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2095
35835446
JR
2096@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2097@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2098This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2099linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2100for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2101about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2102
4f9c04f7 2103Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21041021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2105run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2106has been used.
2107
2108The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2109enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2110
c0065db7
RM
2111@kindex --build-id
2112@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2113@item --build-id
2114@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2115Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2116The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2117file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2118@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2119parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2120@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2121@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2122an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2123characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2124omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2125
2126The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2127that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2128unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2129to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2130file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2131string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2132
2133Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2134@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2135@end table
2136
0285c67d
NC
2137@c man end
2138
36f63dca 2139@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2140
0285c67d
NC
2141@c man begin OPTIONS
2142
ff5dcc92 2143The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2144the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2145normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2146use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2147@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2148like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2149symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2150object file).
2151
2152In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2153support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2154PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2155values by either a space or an equals sign.
2156
ff5dcc92 2157@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2158
2159@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2160@item --add-stdcall-alias
2161If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2162as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2163[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2164
2165@kindex --base-file
2166@item --base-file @var{file}
2167Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2168addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2169@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2170[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2171
2172@kindex --dll
2173@item --dll
2174Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2175@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2176file.
bb10df36 2177[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2178
88183869
DK
2179@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2180@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2181@item --enable-long-section-names
2182@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2183The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2184the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2185for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2186fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2187to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2188allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2189disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2190generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2191as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2192with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2193GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2194information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2195option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2196section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2197when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2198image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2199[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2200
252b5132
RH
2201@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2202@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2203@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2204@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2205If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2206do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2207only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2208resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2209undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2210@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2211to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2212warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2213import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2214to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2215feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2216@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2217mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2218[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2219
2220@cindex DLLs, creating
2221@kindex --export-all-symbols
2222@item --export-all-symbols
2223If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2224be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2225otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2226explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2227attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2228option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2229@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2230@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2231exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2232re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2233such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2234@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2235@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2236Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2237not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2238extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2239(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2240These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2241@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2242@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2243@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2244@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2245[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2246
2247@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2248@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2249Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2250exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2251[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2252
2927aaca
NC
2253@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2254@item --exclude-all-symbols
2255Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2256[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2257
252b5132
RH
2258@kindex --file-alignment
2259@item --file-alignment
2260Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2261file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2262512.
bb10df36 2263[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2264
2265@cindex heap size
2266@kindex --heap
2267@item --heap @var{reserve}
2268@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2269Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2270to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2271committed.
bb10df36 2272[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2273
2274@cindex image base
2275@kindex --image-base
2276@item --image-base @var{value}
2277Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2278the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2279is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2280your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2281other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2282for dlls.
bb10df36 2283[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2284
2285@kindex --kill-at
2286@item --kill-at
2287If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2288symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2289[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2290
26d2d8a2
BF
2291@kindex --large-address-aware
2292@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2293If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2294header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2295greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2296or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2297section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2298[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2299
252b5132
RH
2300@kindex --major-image-version
2301@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2302Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2303[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2304
2305@kindex --major-os-version
2306@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2307Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2308[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2309
2310@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2311@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2312Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2313[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2314
2315@kindex --minor-image-version
2316@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2317Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2318[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2319
2320@kindex --minor-os-version
2321@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2322Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2323[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2324
2325@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2326@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2327Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2328[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2329
2330@cindex DEF files, creating
2331@cindex DLLs, creating
2332@kindex --output-def
2333@item --output-def @var{file}
2334The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2335file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2336(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2337library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2338automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2339[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2340
b044cda1
CW
2341@cindex DLLs, creating
2342@kindex --out-implib
2343@item --out-implib @var{file}
2344The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2345import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2346import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2347may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2348makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2349creation step.
bb10df36 2350[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2351
2352@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2353@item --enable-auto-image-base
2354Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2355using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2356from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2357collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2358avoided.
bb10df36 2359[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2360
2361@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2362@item --disable-auto-image-base
2363Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2364user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2365default.
bb10df36 2366[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2367
2368@cindex DLLs, linking to
2369@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2370@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2371When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2372search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2373@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2374between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2375uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2376@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2377[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2378
2379@kindex --enable-auto-import
2380@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2381Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2382DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2383building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2384'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2385to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2386specification published by Microsoft.
2387
e2a83dd0
NC
2388Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2389data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2390placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2391around a problem with consts that is described here:
2392http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2393
4d8907ac
DS
2394Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2395see this message:
0d888aac 2396
ece2d90e 2397"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2398documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2399
ece2d90e
NC
2400This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2401ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2402allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2403fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2404constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2405multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2406this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2407of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2408the warning, and exit.
2409
2410There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2411data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2412
2fa9fc65
NC
2413One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2414of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2415this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2416
c0065db7
RM
2417A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2418that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2419there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2420a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2421
2422@example
2423extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2424extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2425 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2426@end example
2427
2428or
2429
2430@example
2431extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2432extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2433 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2434@end example
2435
c0065db7 2436For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2437is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2438
2439@example
2440extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2441extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2442 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2443@end example
2444
c406afaf
NC
2445or
2446
2447@example
2448extern long long extern_ll;
2449extern_ll -->
2450 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2451@end example
2452
2fa9fc65 2453A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2454'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2455@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2456requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2457building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2458merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2459between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2460constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2461
2462Original:
2463@example
2464--foo.h
2465extern int arr[];
2466--foo.c
2467#include "foo.h"
2468void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2469 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2470@}
2471@end example
2472
2473Solution 1:
2474@example
2475--foo.h
2476extern int arr[];
2477--foo.c
2478#include "foo.h"
2479void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2480 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2481 volatile int *parr = arr;
2482 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2483@}
2484@end example
2485
2486Solution 2:
2487@example
2488--foo.h
2489/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2490#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2491 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2492#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2493#else
2494#define FOO_IMPORT
2495#endif
2496extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2497--foo.c
2498#include "foo.h"
2499void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2500 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2501@}
2502@end example
2503
c0065db7 2504A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2505library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2506for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2507functions).
bb10df36 2508[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2509
2510@kindex --disable-auto-import
2511@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2512Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2513@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2514[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2515
2fa9fc65
NC
2516@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2517@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2518If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2519that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2520a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2521environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2522[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2523
2524@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2525@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2526Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2527DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2528[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2529
b044cda1
CW
2530@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2531@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2532Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2533[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2534
252b5132
RH
2535@kindex --section-alignment
2536@item --section-alignment
2537Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2538addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2539[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2540
2541@cindex stack size
2542@kindex --stack
2543@item --stack @var{reserve}
2544@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2545Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2546to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2547committed.
bb10df36 2548[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2549
2550@kindex --subsystem
2551@item --subsystem @var{which}
2552@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2553@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2554Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2555legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2556@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2557the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2558@var{which}.
bb10df36 2559[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2560
2f563b51
DK
2561The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2562of the PE file header:
2563[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2564
2565@kindex --dynamicbase
2566@item --dynamicbase
2567The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2568randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2569Vista for i386 PE targets.
2570
2571@kindex --forceinteg
2572@item --forceinteg
2573Code integrity checks are enforced.
2574
2575@kindex --nxcompat
2576@item --nxcompat
2577The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2578This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2579
2580@kindex --no-isolation
2581@item --no-isolation
2582Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2583
2584@kindex --no-seh
2585@item --no-seh
2586The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2587this image.
2588
2589@kindex --no-bind
2590@item --no-bind
2591Do not bind this image.
2592
2593@kindex --wdmdriver
2594@item --wdmdriver
2595The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2596
2597@kindex --tsaware
2598@item --tsaware
2599The image is Terminal Server aware.
2600
252b5132
RH
2601@end table
2602
0285c67d
NC
2603@c man end
2604
93fd0973
SC
2605@ifset M68HC11
2606@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2607
2608@c man begin OPTIONS
2609
2610The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2611memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2612
2613@table @gcctabopt
2614
2615@kindex --no-trampoline
2616@item --no-trampoline
2617This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2618is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2619instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2620
2621@kindex --bank-window
2622@item --bank-window @var{name}
2623This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2624the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2625The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2626paging and addresses within the memory window.
2627
2628@end table
2629
2630@c man end
2631@end ifset
2632
7fb9f789
NC
2633@ifset M68K
2634@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2635
2636@c man begin OPTIONS
2637
2638The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2639when linking for 68K targets.
2640
2641@table @gcctabopt
2642
2643@kindex --got
2644@item --got=@var{type}
2645This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2646@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2647@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2648Info entry for @file{ld}.
2649
2650@end table
2651
2652@c man end
2653@end ifset
2654
252b5132
RH
2655@ifset UsesEnvVars
2656@node Environment
2657@section Environment Variables
2658
0285c67d
NC
2659@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2660
560e09e9 2661You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2662@ifclear SingleFormat
2663@code{GNUTARGET},
2664@end ifclear
2665@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2666
36f63dca 2667@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2668@kindex GNUTARGET
2669@cindex default input format
2670@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2671use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2672of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2673@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2674of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2675attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2676this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2677there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2678object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2679BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2680in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2681@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2682
2683@kindex LDEMULATION
2684@cindex default emulation
2685@cindex emulation, default
2686@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2687@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2688behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2689available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2690the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2691variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2692linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2693
2694@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2695@cindex demangling, default
2696Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2697@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2698default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2699a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2700may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2701options.
2702
0285c67d
NC
2703@c man end
2704@end ifset
2705
252b5132
RH
2706@node Scripts
2707@chapter Linker Scripts
2708
2709@cindex scripts
2710@cindex linker scripts
2711@cindex command files
2712Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2713written in the linker command language.
2714
2715The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2716the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2717the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2718more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2719direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2720described below.
2721
2722The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2723yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2724linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2725to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2726such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2727
2728You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2729line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2730default linker script.
2731
2732You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2733to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2734Linker Scripts}.
2735
2736@menu
2737* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2738* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2739* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2740* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2741* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2742* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2743* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2744* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2745* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2746* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2747* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2748@end menu
2749
2750@node Basic Script Concepts
2751@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2752@cindex linker script concepts
2753We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2754describe the linker script language.
2755
2756The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2757file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2758@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2759The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2760purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2761among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2762section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2763in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2764
2765Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2766also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2767contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2768the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2769A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2770area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2771loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2772which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2773of debugging information.
2774
2775Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2776first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2777the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2778@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2779section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2780same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2781is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2782(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2783based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2784RAM address would be the VMA.
2785
2786You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2787program with the @samp{-h} option.
2788
2789Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2790@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2791has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2792information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2793will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2794static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2795referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2796
2797You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2798program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2799option.
2800
2801@node Script Format
2802@section Linker Script Format
2803@cindex linker script format
2804Linker scripts are text files.
2805
2806You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2807either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2808symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2809generally ignored.
2810
2811Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2812If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2813otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2814double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2815file name.
2816
2817You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2818@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2819to whitespace.
2820
2821@node Simple Example
2822@section Simple Linker Script Example
2823@cindex linker script example
2824@cindex example of linker script
2825Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2826
2827The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2828@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2829memory layout of the output file.
2830
2831The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2832describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2833code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2834@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2835Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2836your input files.
2837
2838For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
28390x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2840linker script which will do that:
2841@smallexample
2842SECTIONS
2843@{
2844 . = 0x10000;
2845 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2846 . = 0x8000000;
2847 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2848 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2849@}
2850@end smallexample
2851
2852You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2853followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2854descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2855
252b5132
RH
2856The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2857sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2858counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2859other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2860current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2861incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2862@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2863
2864The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2865required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2866after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2867which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2868wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2869means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2870
2871Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2872@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2873@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2874
2875The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2876the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2877at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2878output section, the value of the location counter will be
2879@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2880effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2881immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2882
2883The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2884alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2885example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2886sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2887may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2888sections.
2889
2890That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2891
2892@node Simple Commands
2893@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2894@cindex linker script simple commands
2895In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2896
2897@menu
2898* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2899* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2900@ifclear SingleFormat
2901* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2902@end ifclear
2903
4a93e180 2904* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2905* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2906@end menu
2907
2908@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2909@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2910@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2911@cindex start of execution
2912@cindex first instruction
2913@cindex entry point
2914The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2915point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2916entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2917@smallexample
2918ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2919@end smallexample
2920
2921There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2922entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2923stopping when one of them succeeds:
2924@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2925@item
252b5132 2926the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2927@item
252b5132 2928the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2929@item
3ab904c4
NC
2930the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
2931targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2932check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 2933@item
252b5132 2934the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2935@item
252b5132
RH
2936The address @code{0}.
2937@end itemize
2938
2939@node File Commands
36f63dca 2940@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2941@cindex linker script file commands
2942Several linker script commands deal with files.
2943
2944@table @code
2945@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2946@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2947@cindex including a linker script
2948Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2949be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2950with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
295110 levels deep.
2952
4006703d
NS
2953You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2954@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2955
252b5132
RH
2956@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2957@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2958@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2959@cindex input files in linker scripts
2960@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2961@cindex linker script input object files
2962The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2963in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2964
2965For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2966a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2967then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2968
2969In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2970script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2971
e3f2db7f
AO
2972In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2973with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2974located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2975for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2976open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2977linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2978description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2979
ff5dcc92 2980If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2981name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2982@samp{-l}.
2983
2984When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2985files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2986script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2987
2988@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2989@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2990@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2991@cindex grouping input files
2992The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2993files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2994new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2995in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2996
b717d30e
JJ
2997@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2998@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2999@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3000This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3001commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3002as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3003with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3004when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3005@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3006and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3007setting afterwards.
3008
252b5132
RH
3009@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3010@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3011@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3012The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3013@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3014@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3015Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3016precedence.
3017
3018You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3019output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3020
3021@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3022@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3023@cindex library search path in linker script
3024@cindex archive search path in linker script
3025@cindex search path in linker script
3026The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3027@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3028@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3029on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3030are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3031the command line option are searched first.
3032
3033@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3034@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3035@cindex first input file
3036The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3037that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3038though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3039when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3040first file.
3041@end table
3042
3043@ifclear SingleFormat
3044@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3045@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3046A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3047
3048@table @code
3049@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3050@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3051@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3052@cindex output file format in linker script
3053The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3054output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3055exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3056(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3057line option takes precedence.
3058
3059You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3060formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3061This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3062desired endianness.
3063
3064If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3065will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3066output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3067used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3068
3069For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3070command:
3071@smallexample
3072OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3073@end smallexample
3074This says that the default format for the output file is
3075@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3076option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3077format.
3078
3079@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3080@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3081@cindex input file format in linker script
3082The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3083files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3084This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3085(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3086is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3087command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3088@end table
3089@end ifclear
3090
4a93e180
NC
3091@node REGION_ALIAS
3092@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3093@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3094@cindex region alias
3095@cindex region names
3096
3097Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3098@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3099
3100@smallexample
3101REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3102@end smallexample
3103
3104The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3105memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3106to memory regions. An example follows.
3107
3108Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3109memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3110that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3111non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3112access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3113read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3114sections:
3115
3116@itemize @bullet
3117@item
3118@code{.text} program code;
3119@item
3120@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3121@item
3122@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3123@item
3124@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3125@end itemize
3126
3127The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3128part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3129output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3130systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3131@code{C}:
3132@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3133@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3134@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3135@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3136@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3137@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3138@end multitable
3139The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3140loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3141the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3142the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3143
3144The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3145includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3146memory layout:
3147@smallexample
3148INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3149
3150SECTIONS
3151 @{
3152 .text :
3153 @{
3154 *(.text)
3155 @} > REGION_TEXT
3156 .rodata :
3157 @{
3158 *(.rodata)
3159 rodata_end = .;
3160 @} > REGION_RODATA
3161 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3162 @{
3163 data_start = .;
3164 *(.data)
3165 @} > REGION_DATA
3166 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3167 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3168 .bss :
3169 @{
3170 *(.bss)
3171 @} > REGION_BSS
3172 @}
3173@end smallexample
3174
3175Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3176regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3177variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3178@table @code
3179@item A
3180Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3181@smallexample
3182MEMORY
3183 @{
3184 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3185 @}
3186
3187REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3188REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3189REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3190REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3191@end smallexample
3192@item B
3193Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3194into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3195@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3196@smallexample
3197MEMORY
3198 @{
3199 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3200 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3201 @}
3202
3203REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3204REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3205REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3206REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3207@end smallexample
3208@item C
3209Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3210@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3211initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3212system start into the @code{RAM}.
3213@smallexample
3214MEMORY
3215 @{
3216 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3217 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3218 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3219 @}
3220
3221REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3222REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3223REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3224REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3225@end smallexample
3226@end table
3227
3228It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3229@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3230necessary:
3231@smallexample
3232#include <string.h>
3233
3234extern char data_start [];
3235extern char data_size [];
3236extern char data_load_start [];
3237
3238void copy_data(void)
3239@{
3240 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3241 @{
3242 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3243 @}
3244@}
3245@end smallexample
3246
252b5132 3247@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3248@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3249There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3250
3251@table @code
3252@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3253@kindex ASSERT
3254@cindex assertion in linker script
3255Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3256with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3257
3258@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3259@kindex EXTERN
3260@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3261Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3262symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3263modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3264each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3265command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3266
3267@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3268@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3269@cindex common allocation in linker script
3270This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3271to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3272output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3273
4818e05f
AM
3274@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3275@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3276@cindex common allocation in linker script
3277This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3278command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3279to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3280
53d25da6
AM
3281@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3282@kindex INSERT
3283@cindex insert user script into default script
3284This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3285augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3286inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3287@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3288default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3289sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3290linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3291insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3292linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3293default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3294of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3295to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3296is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3297
3298@smallexample
3299SECTIONS
3300@{
3301 OVERLAY :
3302 @{
3303 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3304 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3305 @}
3306@}
3307INSERT AFTER .text;
3308@end smallexample
3309
252b5132
RH
3310@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3311@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3312@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3313This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3314references among certain output sections.
3315
3316In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3317using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3318will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3319errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3320a function defined in the other section.
3321
3322The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3323@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3324an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3325@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3326names.
3327
3328@ifclear SingleFormat
3329@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3330@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3331@cindex machine architecture
3332@cindex architecture
3333Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3334of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3335architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3336the @samp{-f} option.
3337@end ifclear
3338@end table
3339
3340@node Assignments
3341@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3342@cindex assignment in scripts
3343@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3344@cindex variables, defining
3345You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3346the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3347
3348@menu
3349* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3350* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3351* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3352* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3353@end menu
3354
3355@node Simple Assignments
3356@subsection Simple Assignments
3357
3358You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3359
3360@table @code
3361@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3362@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3363@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3364@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3365@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3366@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3367@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3368@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3369@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3370@end table
3371
3372The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3373@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3374defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3375
3376The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3377may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3378
3379The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3380
3381Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3382
3383You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3384statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3385section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3386
3387The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3388expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3389
3390Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3391assignments may be used:
3392
3393@smallexample
3394floating_point = 0;
3395SECTIONS
3396@{
3397 .text :
3398 @{
3399 *(.text)
3400 _etext = .;
3401 @}
156e34dd 3402 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3403 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3404@}
3405@end smallexample
3406@noindent
3407In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3408zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3409the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3410defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3411upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3412
3413@node PROVIDE
3414@subsection PROVIDE
3415@cindex PROVIDE
3416In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3417only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3418the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3419@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3420@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3421@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3422@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3423@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3424
3425Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3426@smallexample
3427SECTIONS
3428@{
3429 .text :
3430 @{
3431 *(.text)
3432 _etext = .;
3433 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3434 @}
3435@}
3436@end smallexample
3437
3438In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3439underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3440the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3441underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3442If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3443linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3444
7af8e998
L
3445@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3446@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3447@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3448Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3449hidden and won't be exported.
3450
73ae6183
NC
3451@node Source Code Reference
3452@subsection Source Code Reference
3453
3454Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3455intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3456a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3457symbol that does not have a value.
3458
3459Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3460transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3461stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3462prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3463mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3464of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3465variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3466linker script variable might be referred to as:
3467
3468@smallexample
3469 extern int foo;
3470@end smallexample
3471
3472But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3473
3474@smallexample
3475 _foo = 1000;
3476@end smallexample
3477
3478In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3479transformation has taken place.
3480
3481When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3482things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3483in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3484second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3485table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3486contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3487value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3488
3489@smallexample
3490 int foo = 1000;
3491@end smallexample
3492
3493creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3494holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3495number 1000 is initially stored.
3496
3497When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3498first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3499memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3500So:
3501
3502@smallexample
3503 foo = 1;
3504@end smallexample
3505
3506looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3507associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3508address. Whereas:
3509
3510@smallexample
3511 int * a = & foo;
3512@end smallexample
3513
3514looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3515and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3516the variable @samp{a}.
3517
3518Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3519the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3520an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3521
3522@smallexample
3523 foo = 1000;
3524@end smallexample
3525
3526creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3527the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3528address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3529linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3530access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3531
3532Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3533you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3534use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3535section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3536linker script contains these declarations:
3537
3538@smallexample
3539@group
3540 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3541 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3542 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3543@end group
3544@end smallexample
3545
3546Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3547
3548@smallexample
3549@group
3550 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3551
73ae6183
NC
3552 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3553@end group
3554@end smallexample
3555
3556Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3557
252b5132 3558@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3559@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3560@kindex SECTIONS
3561The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3562into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3563
3564The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3565@smallexample
3566SECTIONS
3567@{
3568 @var{sections-command}
3569 @var{sections-command}
3570 @dots{}
3571@}
3572@end smallexample
3573
3574Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3575
3576@itemize @bullet
3577@item
3578an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3579@item
3580a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3581@item
3582an output section description
3583@item
3584an overlay description
3585@end itemize
3586
3587The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3588@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3589those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3590understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3591the layout of the output file.
3592
3593Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3594below.
3595
3596If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3597linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3598section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3599input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3600example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3601in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3602
3603@menu
3604* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3605* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3606* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3607* Input Section:: Input section description
3608* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3609* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3610* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3611* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3612* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3613@end menu
3614
3615@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3616@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3617The full description of an output section looks like this:
3618@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3619@group
7e7d5768 3620@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3621 [AT(@var{lma})]
3622 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3623 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3624 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3625 @{
3626 @var{output-section-command}
3627 @var{output-section-command}
3628 @dots{}
562d3460 3629 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3630@end group
3631@end smallexample
3632
3633Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3634
3635The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3636name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3637The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3638
3639Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3640
3641@itemize @bullet
3642@item
3643a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3644@item
3645an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3646@item
3647data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3648@item
3649a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3650@end itemize
3651
3652@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3653@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3654@cindex name, section
3655@cindex section name
3656The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3657meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3658support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3659must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3660example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3661output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3662names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3663quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3664characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3665commas must be quoted.
3666
3667The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3668Discarding}.
3669
3670@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3671@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3672@cindex address, section
3673@cindex section address
3674The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3675address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3676the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3677based on the current value of the location counter.
3678
3679If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3680set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3681@var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3682current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3683requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3684output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3685within the output section.
3686
3687For example,
3688@smallexample
3689.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3690@end smallexample
3691@noindent
3692and
3693@smallexample
3694.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3695@end smallexample
3696@noindent
3697are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3698@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3699counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3700counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3701section.
3702
3703The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3704For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3705so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3706do something like this:
3707@smallexample
3708.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3709@end smallexample
3710@noindent
3711This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3712aligned upward to the specified value.
3713
3714Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3715location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3716sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3717
3718@node Input Section
36f63dca 3719@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3720@cindex input sections
3721@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3722The most common output section command is an input section description.
3723
3724The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3725You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3726in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3727map the input files into your memory layout.
3728
3729@menu
3730* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3731* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3732* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3733* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3734* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3735@end menu
3736
3737@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3738@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3739@cindex input section basics
3740An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3741by a list of section names in parentheses.
3742
3743The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3744describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3745
3746The most common input section description is to include all input
3747sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3748include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3749@smallexample
3750*(.text)
3751@end smallexample
3752@noindent
18625d54
CM
3753Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3754of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3755match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3756example:
252b5132 3757@smallexample
b4346c09 3758*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3759@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3760will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3761@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3762
3763There are two ways to include more than one section:
3764@smallexample
3765*(.text .rdata)
3766*(.text) *(.rdata)
3767@end smallexample
3768@noindent
3769The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3770@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3771first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3772they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3773@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3774@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3775
3776You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3777You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3778needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3779@smallexample
3780data.o(.data)
3781@end smallexample
3782
967928e9
AM
3783You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3784matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3785with no whitespace around the colon.
3786
3787@table @samp
3788@item archive:file
3789matches file within archive
3790@item archive:
3791matches the whole archive
3792@item :file
3793matches file but not one in an archive
3794@end table
3795
3796Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3797wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3798single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3799@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3800within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3801also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3802other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3803from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3804command.
3805
252b5132
RH
3806If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3807the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3808commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3809@smallexample
3810data.o
3811@end smallexample
3812
967928e9
AM
3813When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3814and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3815characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3816name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3817did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3818though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3819@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3820the archive search path.
3821
3822@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3823@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3824@cindex input section wildcards
3825@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3826@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3827@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3828In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3829name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3830
3831The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3832pattern for the file name.
3833
3834The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3835
3836@table @samp
3837@item *
3838matches any number of characters
3839@item ?
3840matches any single character
3841@item [@var{chars}]
3842matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3843character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3844@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3845@item \
3846quotes the following character
3847@end table
3848
3849When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3850will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3851Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3852exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3853@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3854a @samp{/} character.
3855
3856File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3857specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3858does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3859
3860If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3861appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3862will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3863sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3864@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3865@smallexample
3866.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3867.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3868@end smallexample
3869
bcaa7b3e 3870@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3871Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3872in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3873this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3874pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3875@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3876into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3877
bcaa7b3e
L
3878@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3879@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3880difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3881ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3882
3883@cindex SORT
3884@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3885
3886When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3887can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3888
3889@enumerate
3890@item
3891@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3892It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3893sections have the same name.
3894@item
3895@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3896It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3897sections have the same alignment.
3898@item
c0065db7 3899@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3900treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3901@item
3902@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3903is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3904@item
3905All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3906@end enumerate
3907
3908When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3909section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3910takes precedence over the command line option.
3911
3912If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3913command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3914treated as nested sorting command.
3915
3916@enumerate
3917@item
3918@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3919@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3920@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3921@item
3922@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3923@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3924@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3925@end enumerate
3926
3927If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3928command line option will be ignored.
3929
252b5132
RH
3930If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3931@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3932precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3933
3934This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3935files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3936sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3937The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3938with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3939linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3940@smallexample
3941@group
3942SECTIONS @{
3943 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3944 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3945 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3946 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3947@}
3948@end group
3949@end smallexample
3950
3951@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3952@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3953@cindex common symbol placement
3954@cindex uninitialized data placement
3955A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3956file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3957linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3958named @samp{COMMON}.
3959
3960You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3961other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3962particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3963input files are placed in another section.
3964
3965In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3966@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3967@smallexample
3968.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3969@end smallexample
3970
3971@cindex scommon section
3972@cindex small common symbols
3973Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3974example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3975symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3976different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3977the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3978symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3979to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3980locations.
3981
3982@cindex [COMMON]
3983You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3984notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3985@samp{*(COMMON)}.
3986
3987@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 3988@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
3989@cindex KEEP
3990@cindex garbage collection
3991When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 3992it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
3993This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3994with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 3995@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
3996
3997@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 3998@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
3999The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4000to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4001start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4002@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4003follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4004@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4005@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4006All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4007files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4008
4009@smallexample
4010@group
4011SECTIONS @{
4012 outputa 0x10000 :
4013 @{
4014 all.o
4015 foo.o (.input1)
4016 @}
36f63dca
NC
4017@end group
4018@group
252b5132
RH
4019 outputb :
4020 @{
4021 foo.o (.input2)
4022 foo1.o (.input1)
4023 @}
36f63dca
NC
4024@end group
4025@group
252b5132
RH
4026 outputc :
4027 @{
4028 *(.input1)
4029 *(.input2)
4030 @}
4031@}
4032@end group
a1ab1d2a 4033@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4034
4035@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4036@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4037@cindex data
4038@cindex section data
4039@cindex output section data
4040@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4041@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4042@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4043@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4044@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4045You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4046@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4047an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4048parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4049value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4050counter.
4051
4052The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4053store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4054bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4055stored.
4056
4057For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4058of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4059@smallexample
4060BYTE(1)
4061LONG(addr)
4062@end smallexample
4063
4064When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4065same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4066target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4067@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4068@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4069
4070If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4071which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4072When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4073true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4074endianness of the first input object file.
4075
36f63dca 4076Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4077between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4078@smallexample
4079SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4080@end smallexample
4081whereas this will work:
4082@smallexample
4083SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4084@end smallexample
4085
252b5132
RH
4086@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4087@cindex holes, filling
4088@cindex unspecified memory
4089You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4090current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4091otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4092gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4093with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4094necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4095point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4096than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4097different parts of an output section.
4098
4099This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4100value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4101@smallexample
563e308f 4102FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4103@end smallexample
4104
4105The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4106section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4107part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4108entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4109precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4110expression.
252b5132
RH
4111
4112@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4113@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4114There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4115commands.
4116
4117@table @code
4118@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4119@cindex input filename symbols
4120@cindex filename symbols
4121@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4122The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4123The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4124file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4125the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4126
4127This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4128normally used for any other object file format.
4129
4130@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4131@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4132@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4133@item CONSTRUCTORS
4134When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4135unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4136destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4137arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4138automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4139For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4140linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4141@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4142ignored for other object file formats.
4143
4144The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4145constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4146Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4147the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4148first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4149of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4150compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4151formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4152@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4153the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4154destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4155@code{exit}.
4156
4157For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4158arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4159addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4160and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4161linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4162runtime code expects to see.
4163
4164@smallexample
4165 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4166 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4167 *(.ctors)
4168 LONG(0)
4169 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4170 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4171 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4172 *(.dtors)
4173 LONG(0)
4174 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4175@end smallexample
4176
4177If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4178which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4179are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4180are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4181command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4182@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4183@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4184@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4185
4186Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4187and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4188need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4189scripts.
4190
4191@end table
4192
4193@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4194@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4195@cindex discarding sections
4196@cindex sections, discarding
4197@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4198The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4199for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4200be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4201@smallexample
49c13adb 4202.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4203@end smallexample
4204@noindent
4205will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4206@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4207sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4208space in an output section will also create the output section.
4209
a0976ea4 4210The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4211on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4212symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4213the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4214section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4215
4216@cindex /DISCARD/
4217The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4218input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4219section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4220
4221@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4222@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4223@cindex output section attributes
4224We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4225like this:
0c71d759 4226
252b5132 4227@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4228@group
7e7d5768 4229@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4230 [AT(@var{lma})]
4231 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4232 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4233 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4234 @{
4235 @var{output-section-command}
4236 @var{output-section-command}
4237 @dots{}
562d3460 4238 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4239@end group
4240@end smallexample
0c71d759 4241
252b5132
RH
4242We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4243@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4244remaining section attributes.
4245
a1ab1d2a 4246@menu
252b5132
RH
4247* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4248* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4249* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4250* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4251* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4252* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4253* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4254* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4255@end menu
4256
4257@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4258@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4259Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4260parentheses. The following types are defined:
4261
4262@table @code
4263@item NOLOAD
4264The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4265loaded into memory when the program is run.
4266@item DSECT
4267@itemx COPY
4268@itemx INFO
4269@itemx OVERLAY
4270These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4271rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4272marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4273section when the program is run.
4274@end table
4275
4276@kindex NOLOAD
4277@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4278@cindex loading, preventing
4279The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4280the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4281the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4282@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4283need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
4284@samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
4285@smallexample
4286@group
4287SECTIONS @{
4288 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4289 @dots{}
4290@}
4291@end group
4292@end smallexample
4293
4294@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4295@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4296@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4297@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4298@cindex load address
4299@cindex section load address
4300Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4301@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
4302an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
4303Address}).
4304
dc0b6aa0
AM
4305The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
4306the load address of the section.
6bdafbeb
NC
4307
4308Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
4309specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
4310Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
4311linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4312
4313If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4314section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
4315VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
4316section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
4317or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
4318to the VMA.
6bdafbeb 4319@xref{Output Section Region}.
252b5132
RH
4320
4321@cindex ROM initialized data
4322@cindex initialized data in ROM
4323This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4324example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4325called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4326@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4327even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4328uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4329defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4330counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4331
4332@smallexample
4333@group
4334SECTIONS
4335 @{
4336 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4337 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4338 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4339 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4340 .bss 0x3000 :
4341 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4342@}
4343@end group
4344@end smallexample
4345
4346The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4347this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4348the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4349how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4350script.
4351
4352@smallexample
4353@group
4354extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4355char *src = &_etext;
4356char *dst = &_data;
4357
4358/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4359while (dst < &_edata) @{
4360 *dst++ = *src++;
4361@}
4362
4363/* Zero bss */
4364for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4365 *dst = 0;
4366@end group
4367@end smallexample
4368
bbf115d3
L
4369@node Forced Output Alignment
4370@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4371@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4372@cindex forcing output section alignment
4373@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4374You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4375
7e7d5768
AM
4376@node Forced Input Alignment
4377@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4378@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4379@cindex forcing input section alignment
4380@cindex input section alignment
4381You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4382SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4383sections, whether larger or smaller.
4384
0c71d759
NC
4385@node Output Section Constraint
4386@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4387@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4388@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4389@cindex constraints on output sections
4390You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4391of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4392read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4393@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4394
252b5132 4395@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4396@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4397@kindex >@var{region}
4398@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4399@cindex memory regions and sections
4400You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4401using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4402
4403Here is a simple example:
4404@smallexample
4405@group
4406MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4407SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4408@end group
4409@end smallexample
4410
4411@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4412@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4413@kindex :@var{phdr}
4414@cindex section, assigning to program header
4415@cindex program headers and sections
4416You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4417using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4418one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4419assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4420@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4421linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4422
4423Here is a simple example:
4424@smallexample
4425@group
4426PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4427SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4428@end group
4429@end smallexample
4430
4431@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4432@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4433@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4434@cindex section fill pattern
4435@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4436You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4437@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4438(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4439within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4440alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4441necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4442of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4443an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4444fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4445other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4446pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4447expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4448
4449You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4450output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4451
4452Here is a simple example:
4453@smallexample
4454@group
563e308f 4455SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4456@end group
4457@end smallexample
4458
4459@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4460@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4461@kindex OVERLAY
4462@cindex overlays
4463An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4464are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4465the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4466copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4467required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4468can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4469than another.
4470
4471Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4472@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4473output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4474command is as follows:
4475@smallexample
4476@group
4477OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4478 @{
4479 @var{secname1}
4480 @{
4481 @var{output-section-command}
4482 @var{output-section-command}
4483 @dots{}
4484 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4485 @var{secname2}
4486 @{
4487 @var{output-section-command}
4488 @var{output-section-command}
4489 @dots{}
4490 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4491 @dots{}
4492 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4493@end group
4494@end smallexample
4495
4496Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4497section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4498section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4499those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4500except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4501sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4502
4503The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4504addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4505memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4506whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4507and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4508and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4509
4510If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4511among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4512all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4513section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4514NOCROSSREFS}.
4515
4516For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4517provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4518defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4519@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4520the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4521within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4522symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4523
4524At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4525the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4526
4527Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4528@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4529@smallexample
4530@group
4531 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4532 @{
4533 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4534 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4535 @}
4536@end group
4537@end smallexample
4538@noindent
4539This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4540address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4541@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4542following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4543@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4544@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4545
4546C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4547like the following.
4548
4549@smallexample
4550@group
4551 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4552 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4553 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4554@end group
4555@end smallexample
4556
4557Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4558everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4559example could have been written identically as follows.
4560
4561@smallexample
4562@group
4563 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4564 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4565 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4566 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4567 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4568 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4569 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4570@end group
4571@end smallexample
4572
4573@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4574@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4575@kindex MEMORY
4576@cindex memory regions
4577@cindex regions of memory
4578@cindex allocating memory
4579@cindex discontinuous memory
4580The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4581memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4582
4583The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4584memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4585may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4586can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4587set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4588regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4589around to fit into the available regions.
4590
4591A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4592command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4593you wish. The syntax is:
4594@smallexample
4595@group
a1ab1d2a 4596MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4597 @{
4598 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4599 @dots{}
4600 @}
4601@end group
4602@end smallexample
4603
4604The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4605region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4606Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4607with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4608must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4609add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4610command.
252b5132
RH
4611
4612@cindex memory region attributes
4613The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4614whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4615not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4616@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4617section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4618the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4619them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4620
4621The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4622@table @samp
4623@item R
4624Read-only section
4625@item W
4626Read/write section
4627@item X
4628Executable section
4629@item A
4630Allocatable section
4631@item I
4632Initialized section
4633@item L
4634Same as @samp{I}
4635@item !
4636Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4637@end table
4638
4639If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4640@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4641attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4642in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4643attributes.
4644
4645@kindex ORIGIN =
4646@kindex o =
4647@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4648The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4649the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4650cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4651abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4652@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4653
4654@kindex LENGTH =
4655@kindex len =
4656@kindex l =
4657The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4658region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4659be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4660@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4661
4662In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4663available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4664and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4665linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4666is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4667or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4668explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4669region.
4670
4671@smallexample
4672@group
a1ab1d2a 4673MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4674 @{
4675 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4676 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4677 @}
4678@end group
4679@end smallexample
4680
4681Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4682specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4683@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4684a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4685output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4686was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4687the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4688output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4689region, the linker will issue an error message.
4690
3ec57632 4691It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4692expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4693@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4694
4695@smallexample
4696@group
c0065db7 4697 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4698@end group
4699@end smallexample
4700
252b5132
RH
4701@node PHDRS
4702@section PHDRS Command
4703@kindex PHDRS
4704@cindex program headers
4705@cindex ELF program headers
4706@cindex program segments
4707@cindex segments, ELF
4708The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4709@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4710loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4711program with the @samp{-p} option.
4712
4713When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4714reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4715program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4716This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4717interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4718
4719The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4720in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4721precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4722the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4723not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4724
4725The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4726generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4727ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4728
4729This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4730@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4731
4732@smallexample
4733@group
4734PHDRS
4735@{
4736 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4737 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4738@}
4739@end group
4740@end smallexample
4741
4742The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4743of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4744header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4745with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4746must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4747is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4748
4749Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4750system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4751specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4752sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4753attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4754Section Phdr}.
4755
4756It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4757merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4758repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4759contain the section.
4760
4761If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4762then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4763not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4764convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4765placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4766default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4767segment at all.
4768
4769@kindex FILEHDR
4770@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4771You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4772the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4773The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4774file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4775include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4776segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4777these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4778
4779The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4780value of the keyword.
4781
4782@table @asis
4783@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4784Indicates an unused program header.
4785
4786@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4787Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4788the file.
4789
4790@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4791Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4792
4793@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4794Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4795found.
4796
4797@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4798Indicates a segment holding note information.
4799
4800@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4801A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4802ABI.
4803
4804@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4805Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4806
4807@item @var{expression}
4808An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4809be used for types not defined above.
4810@end table
4811
4812You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4813in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4814@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4815Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4816output section attribute.
4817
4818The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4819which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4820explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4821an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4822header.
4823
4824Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4825headers used on a native ELF system.
4826
4827@example
4828@group
4829PHDRS
4830@{
4831 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4832 interp PT_INTERP ;
4833 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4834 data PT_LOAD ;
4835 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4836@}
4837
4838SECTIONS
4839@{
4840 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4841 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4842 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4843 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4844 @dots{}
4845 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4846 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4847 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4848 @dots{}
4849@}
4850@end group
4851@end example
4852
4853@node VERSION
4854@section VERSION Command
4855@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4856@cindex symbol versions
4857@cindex version script
4858@cindex versions of symbols
4859The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4860only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4861symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4862a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4863shared library.
4864
4865You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4866you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4867also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4868
4869The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4870@smallexample
4871VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4872@end smallexample
4873
4874The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4875Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4876version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4877version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4878version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4879scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4880library.
4881
4882The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4883examples.
4884
4885@smallexample
4886VERS_1.1 @{
4887 global:
4888 foo1;
4889 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4890 old*;
4891 original*;
4892 new*;
252b5132
RH
4893@};
4894
4895VERS_1.2 @{
4896 foo2;
4897@} VERS_1.1;
4898
4899VERS_2.0 @{
4900 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4901 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb
MM
4902 ns::*;
4903 "int f(int, double)";
c0065db7 4904 @}
252b5132
RH
4905@} VERS_1.2;
4906@end smallexample
4907
4908This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4909version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4910The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4911a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4912of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4913symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4914is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4915in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4916However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4917name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4918
4919Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4920depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4921to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4922
4923Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4924depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4925and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4926
4927When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4928specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4929unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4930unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
4931somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4932wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4933wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4934set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4935ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
4936
4937The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4938they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4939could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4940However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4941
0f6bf451 4942Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4943in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4944symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4945won't.
4946
4947@smallexample
7c9c73be 4948@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4949@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4950
252b5132
RH
4951When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4952symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4953requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4954shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4955loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4956linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4957application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4958way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4959all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4960search for each symbol reference.
4961
4962The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4963doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4964that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4965functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4966the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4967required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4968that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4969versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4970the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4971
4972There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4973first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4974source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4975script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4976maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4977@smallexample
4978__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4979@end smallexample
4980@noindent
4981in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4982be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4983The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
4984@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4985takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
4986
4987The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4988function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4989an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4990version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4991linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4992
4993To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4994source file. Here is an example:
4995
4996@smallexample
4997__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4998__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4999__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5000__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5001@end smallexample
5002
5003In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5004unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5005example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5006@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5007
5008When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5009some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5010this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5011@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5012declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5013you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5014
5015If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5016within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5017(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5018specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5019
cb840a31
L
5020You can also specify the language in the version script:
5021
5022@smallexample
5023VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5024@end smallexample
5025
c0065db7 5026The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5027The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5028demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5029patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
5030
86043bbb
MM
5031Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5032described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5033or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5034the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5035whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5036cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5037might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5038should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5039expect when you upgrade.
5040
252b5132
RH
5041@node Expressions
5042@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5043@cindex expressions
5044@cindex arithmetic
5045The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5046that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5047expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5048host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5049
5050You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5051
5052The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5053expressions.
5054
5055@menu
5056* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5057* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5058* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5059* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5060* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5061* Operators:: Operators
5062* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5063* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5064* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5065@end menu
5066
5067@node Constants
5068@subsection Constants
5069@cindex integer notation
5070@cindex constants in linker scripts
5071All constants are integers.
5072
5073As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5074octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
5075hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5076@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5077@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5078value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5079
5080@cindex scaled integers
5081@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5082@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5083@cindex suffixes for integers
5084@cindex integer suffixes
5085In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5086constant by
5087@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5088@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5089@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5090@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5091@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5092@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5093@tex
5094${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5095@end tex
5096@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5097respectively. For example, the following
5098all refer to the same quantity:
5099
252b5132 5100@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5101_fourk_1 = 4K;
5102_fourk_2 = 4096;
5103_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5104_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5105@end smallexample
5106
8a308ae8
NC
5107Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5108conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5109
0c71d759
NC
5110@node Symbolic Constants
5111@subsection Symbolic Constants
5112@cindex symbolic constants
5113@kindex CONSTANT
5114It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5115the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5116
5117@table @code
5118@item MAXPAGESIZE
5119@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5120The target's maximum page size.
5121
5122@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5123@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5124The target's default page size.
5125@end table
5126
5127So for example:
5128
5129@smallexample
5130 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5131@end smallexample
5132
5133will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5134supported by the target.
5135
252b5132
RH
5136@node Symbols
5137@subsection Symbol Names
5138@cindex symbol names
5139@cindex names
5140@cindex quoted symbol names
5141@kindex "
5142Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5143and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5144Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5145specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5146keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5147@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5148"SECTION" = 9;
5149"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5150@end smallexample
5151
5152Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5153to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5154whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5155
ecca9871
L
5156@node Orphan Sections
5157@subsection Orphan Sections
5158@cindex orphan
5159Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5160are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5161script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5162output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5163placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5164attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5165same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5166If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5167at the end of the file.
5168
5169For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5170well as section flag.
5171
41911f68 5172If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5173the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5174__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5175section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5176orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5177representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5178character.
5179
252b5132
RH
5180@node Location Counter
5181@subsection The Location Counter
5182@kindex .
5183@cindex dot
5184@cindex location counter
5185@cindex current output location
5186The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5187current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5188location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5189within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5190anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5191
5192@cindex holes
5193Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5194moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5195location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5196and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5197doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5198
5199@smallexample
5200SECTIONS
5201@{
5202 output :
5203 @{
5204 file1(.text)
5205 . = . + 1000;
5206 file2(.text)
5207 . += 1000;
5208 file3(.text)
563e308f 5209 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5210@}
5211@end smallexample
5212@noindent
5213In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5214located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5215followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5216@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5217@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5218specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5219
5c6bbab8
NC
5220@cindex dot inside sections
5221Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5222current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5223statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5224absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5225however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5226not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5227
5228@smallexample
5229SECTIONS
5230@{
5231 . = 0x100
5232 .text: @{
5233 *(.text)
5234 . = 0x200
5235 @}
5236 . = 0x500
5237 .data: @{
5238 *(.data)
5239 . += 0x600
5240 @}
5241@}
5242@end smallexample
5243
5244The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5245and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5246the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5247much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5248move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5249and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5250the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5251the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5252
b5666f2f
AM
5253@cindex dot outside sections
5254Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5255output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5256needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5257
5258@smallexample
5259SECTIONS
5260@{
5261 start_of_text = . ;
5262 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5263 end_of_text = . ;
5264
5265 start_of_data = . ;
5266 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5267 end_of_data = . ;
5268@}
5269@end smallexample
5270
5271If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5272not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5273between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5274should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5275blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5276the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5277sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5278statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5279special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5280place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5281as follows:
5282
5283@smallexample
5284SECTIONS
5285@{
5286 start_of_text = . ;
5287 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5288 end_of_text = . ;
5289
5290 start_of_data = . ;
5291 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5292 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5293 end_of_data = . ;
5294@}
5295@end smallexample
5296
5297This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5298@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5299placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5300assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5301a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5302section. So you could write:
5303
5304@smallexample
5305SECTIONS
5306@{
5307 start_of_text = . ;
5308 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5309 end_of_text = . ;
5310
5311 . = . ;
5312 start_of_data = . ;
5313 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5314 end_of_data = . ;
5315@}
5316@end smallexample
5317
5318Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5319@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5320
252b5132
RH
5321@need 2000
5322@node Operators
5323@subsection Operators
5324@cindex operators for arithmetic
5325@cindex arithmetic operators
5326@cindex precedence in expressions
5327The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5328the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5329@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5330@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5331@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5332@smallexample
5333precedence associativity Operators Notes
5334(highest)
53351 left ! - ~ (1)
53362 left * / %
53373 left + -
53384 left >> <<
53395 left == != > < <= >=
53406 left &
53417 left |
53428 left &&
53439 left ||
534410 right ? :
534511 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5346(lowest)
5347@end smallexample
5348Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5349(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5350(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5351@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5352@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5353@tex
5354\vskip \baselineskip
5355%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5356\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5357\hrule
5358\halign
5359{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5360height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5361&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5362height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5363\noalign{\hrule}
5364height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5365&highest&&&&&\cr
5366% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5367&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5368&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5369&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5370&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5371&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5372&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5373&7&&left&&|&\cr
5374&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5375&9&&left&&||&\cr
5376&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5377&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5378&lowest&&&&&\cr
5379height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5380\hrule}
5381@end tex
5382@iftex
5383{
5384@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5385@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5386@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5387}
5388@end iftex
5389@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5390
5391@node Evaluation
5392@subsection Evaluation
5393@cindex lazy evaluation
5394@cindex expression evaluation order
5395The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5396an expression when absolutely necessary.
5397
5398The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5399address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5400regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5401as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5402
5403However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5404until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5405other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5406for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5407
5408The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5409assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5410allocation.
5411
5412Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5413@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5414
5415If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5416available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5417following
5418@smallexample
5419@group
5420SECTIONS
5421 @{
a1ab1d2a 5422 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5423 @{ *(.text) @}
5424 @}
5425@end group
5426@end smallexample
5427@noindent
5428will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5429address}.
5430
5431@node Expression Section
5432@subsection The Section of an Expression
5433@cindex expression sections
5434@cindex absolute expressions
5435@cindex relative expressions
5436@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5437@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5438@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5439When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5440or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5441fixed offset from the base of a section.
5442
5443The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5444whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5445an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5446section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5447
5448A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5449relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5450further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5451section will be the section of the relative expression.
5452
5453A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5454through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5455will not have any particular associated section.
5456
5457You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5458to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5459create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5460section @samp{.data}:
5461@smallexample
5462SECTIONS
5463 @{
5464 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5465 @}
5466@end smallexample
5467@noindent
5468If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5469@samp{.data} section.
5470
5471@node Builtin Functions
5472@subsection Builtin Functions
5473@cindex functions in expressions
5474The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5475use in linker script expressions.
5476
5477@table @code
5478@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5479@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5480@cindex expression, absolute
5481Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5482of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5483value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5484normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5485
5486@item ADDR(@var{section})
5487@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5488@cindex section address in expression
5489Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5490script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5491the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5492identical values:
5493@smallexample
5494@group
5495SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5496 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5497 @{
252b5132
RH
5498 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5499 @dots{}
5500 @}
5501 .output :
5502 @{
5503 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5504 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5505 @}
5506@dots{} @}
5507@end group
5508@end smallexample
5509
876f4090
NS
5510@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5511@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5512@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5513@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5514@cindex round up location counter
5515@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5516@cindex round up expression
5517@cindex align expression
5518Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5519to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5520doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5521arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5522expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5523equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5524
5525Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5526next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5527variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5528input sections:
252b5132
RH
5529@smallexample
5530@group
5531SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5532 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5533 *(.data)
5534 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5535 @}
5536@dots{} @}
5537@end group
5538@end smallexample
5539@noindent
5540The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5541a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5542a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5543of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5544
5545The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5546
362c1d1a
NS
5547@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5548@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5549@cindex section alignment
5550Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5551been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5552evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5553the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5554value in that section.
5555@smallexample
5556@group
5557SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5558 .output @{
5559 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5560 @dots{}
5561 @}
5562@dots{} @}
5563@end group
5564@end smallexample
5565
252b5132
RH
5566@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5567@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5568This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5569scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5570section.
5571
2d20f7bf
JJ
5572@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5573@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5574This is equivalent to either
5575@smallexample
5576(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5577@end smallexample
5578or
5579@smallexample
5580(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5581@end smallexample
5582@noindent
5583depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5584for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5585@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5586If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5587memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5588bytes in the on-disk file.
5589
5590This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5591any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5592@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5593be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5594working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5595
5596@noindent
5597Example:
5598@smallexample
5599 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5600@end smallexample
5601
5602@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5603@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5604This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5605evaluation purposes.
5606
5607@smallexample
5608 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5609@end smallexample
5610
a4f5ad88
JJ
5611@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5612@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5613This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5614@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5615When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5616does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5617@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5618boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5619it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5620@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5621
5622@smallexample
5623 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5624@end smallexample
5625
252b5132
RH
5626@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5627@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5628@cindex symbol defaults
5629Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5630defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5631return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5632default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5633shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5634the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5635existed, its value is preserved:
5636
5637@smallexample
5638@group
5639SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5640 .text : @{
5641 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5642 @dots{}
5643 @}
5644 @dots{}
5645@}
5646@end group
5647@end smallexample
5648
3ec57632
NC
5649@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5650@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5651Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5652
252b5132
RH
5653@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5654@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5655@cindex section load address in expression
5656Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5657the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5658attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5659Section LMA}).
5660
5661@kindex MAX
5662@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5663Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5664
5665@kindex MIN
5666@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5667Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5668
5669@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5670@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5671@cindex unallocated address, next
5672Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5673This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5674use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5675output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5676
3ec57632
NC
5677@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5678@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5679Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5680
ba916c8a
MM
5681@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5682@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5683Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5684value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5685option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5686@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5687be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5688``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5689name.
5690
252b5132
RH
5691@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5692@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5693@cindex section size
5694Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5695been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5696evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5697@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5698@smallexample
5699@group
5700SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5701 .output @{
5702 .start = . ;
5703 @dots{}
5704 .end = . ;
5705 @}
5706 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5707 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5708@dots{} @}
5709@end group
5710@end smallexample
5711
5712@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5713@itemx sizeof_headers
5714@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5715@cindex header size
5716Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5717information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5718this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5719choose, to facilitate paging.
5720
5721@cindex not enough room for program headers
5722@cindex program headers, not enough room
5723When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5724@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5725number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5726addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5727additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5728room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5729the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5730script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5731you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5732command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5733@end table
5734
5735@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5736@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5737@cindex implicit linker scripts
5738If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5739an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5740linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5741linker will report an error.
5742
5743An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5744
5745Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5746assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5747commands.
5748
5749Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5750at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5751read. This can affect archive searching.
5752
5753@ifset GENERIC
5754@node Machine Dependent
5755@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5756
5757@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5758@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5759sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5760functionality are not listed.
5761
5762@menu
36f63dca
NC
5763@ifset H8300
5764* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5765@end ifset
5766@ifset I960
5767* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5768@end ifset
5769@ifset ARM
5770* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5771@end ifset
5772@ifset HPPA
5773* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5774@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5775@ifset M68K
5776* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5777@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5778@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5779* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5780@end ifset
2469cfa2 5781@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5782* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5783@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5784@ifset M68HC11
5785* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5786@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5787@ifset POWERPC
5788* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5789@end ifset
5790@ifset POWERPC64
5791* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5792@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5793@ifset SPU
5794* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5795@end ifset
74459f0e 5796@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5797* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5798@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5799@ifset WIN32
5800* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5801@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5802@ifset XTENSA
5803* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5804@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5805@end menu
5806@end ifset
5807
252b5132
RH
5808@ifset H8300
5809@ifclear GENERIC
5810@raisesections
5811@end ifclear
5812
5813@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5814@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5815
5816@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5817For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5818you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5819
5820@table @emph
5821@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5822@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5823@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5824targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5825program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5826respectively.
5827
5828@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5829@item synthesizing instructions
5830@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5831@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5832sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5833page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5834(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5835@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5836top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5837
5838@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5839@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5840biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5841which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5842page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5843(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5844@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5845the top page of memory).
5846
5847@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5848@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
584932 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5850changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5851(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5852@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5853the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5854@end table
5855
5856@ifclear GENERIC
5857@lowersections
5858@end ifclear
5859@end ifset
5860
36f63dca 5861@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5862@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5863@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5864@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5865@node Renesas
5866@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5867
c2dcd04e
NC
5868@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5869H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5870options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5871@end ifset
5872@end ifclear
5873
5874@ifset I960
5875@ifclear GENERIC
5876@raisesections
5877@end ifclear
5878
5879@node i960
5880@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5881
5882@cindex i960 support
5883
5884You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5885specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5886family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5887incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5888linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5889libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5890search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5891
5892For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5893well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5894paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5895the names
5896
5897@smallexample
5898@group
5899try
5900libtry.a
5901tryca
5902libtryca.a
5903@end group
5904@end smallexample
5905
5906@noindent
5907The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5908two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5909
5910You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5911the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5912use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5913specifies a library.
5914
5915@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5916@cindex relaxing on i960
5917@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5918you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5919@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5920them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5921instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5922instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5923target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5924not itself call any subroutines).
5925
48229727
JB
5926@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
5927@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
5928@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
5929The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
5930
5931The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
5932
36f63dca
NC
5933@ifclear GENERIC
5934@lowersections
5935@end ifclear
5936@end ifset
5937
5938@ifset ARM
5939@ifclear GENERIC
5940@raisesections
5941@end ifclear
5942
93fd0973
SC
5943@ifset M68HC11
5944@ifclear GENERIC
5945@raisesections
5946@end ifclear
5947
5948@node M68HC11/68HC12
5949@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5950
5951@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5952
5953@subsection Linker Relaxation
5954
5955For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5956optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5957
5958@table @emph
5959@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5960@item relaxing address modes
5961@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5962targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5963program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5964respectively.
5965
5966@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5967transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5968page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5969
5970@item relaxing gcc instruction group
5971When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5972of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5973addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5974@code{bset} instructions.
5975
5976@end table
5977
5978@subsection Trampoline Generation
5979
5980@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5981@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5982For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5983call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 5984will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
5985trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5986case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5987point to the function trampoline.
5988
5989@ifclear GENERIC
5990@lowersections
5991@end ifclear
5992@end ifset
5993
36f63dca 5994@node ARM
3674e28a 5995@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
5996
5997@cindex ARM interworking support
5998@kindex --support-old-code
5999For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6000between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6001been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6002line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6003libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6004option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6005given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6006which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6007the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6008non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6009
6010@cindex thumb entry point
6011@cindex entry point, thumb
6012@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6013The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6014@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6015But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6016branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6017executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6018
ce11ba6c
KT
6019@cindex PE import table prefixing
6020@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6021The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6022the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6023elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6024import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6025
e489d0ae
PB
6026@cindex BE8
6027@kindex --be8
6028The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6029executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6030The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6031
3674e28a
PB
6032@cindex TARGET1
6033@kindex --target1-rel
6034@kindex --target1-abs
6035The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6036@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6037or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6038and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6039
6040@cindex TARGET2
6041@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6042The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6043@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6044meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6045@table @samp
6046@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6047@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6048@item abs
6049@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6050@item got-rel
6051@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6052@end table
6053
319850b4
JB
6054@cindex FIX_V4BX
6055@kindex --fix-v4bx
6056The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6057specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6058interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6059also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6060
6061In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6062linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6063@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6064
6065In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6066relocations are ignored.
6067
845b51d6
PB
6068@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6069@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6070Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6071relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6072
6073@smallexample
6074TST rM, #1
6075MOVEQ PC, rM
6076BX Rn
6077@end smallexample
6078
6079This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6080and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6081condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6082
33bfe774
JB
6083@cindex USE_BLX
6084@kindex --use-blx
6085The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6086BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6087situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6088code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6089each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6090
6091This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6092specify it if you are using that target.
6093
c6dd86c6
JB
6094@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6095@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6096The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6097bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6098instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6099to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6100the support code can read the intended values.
6101
6102The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6103intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6104and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6105intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6106full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6107you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6108
6109If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6110enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6111@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6112mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6113vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6114@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6115
6116If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6117potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6118such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6119first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6120instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6121the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6122are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6123
bf21ed78
MS
6124@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6125@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6126The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6127warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6128enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6129linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6130using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6131not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6132
6133@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6134@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6135The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6136warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6137@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6138linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6139using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6140
726150b7
NC
6141@cindex PIC_VENEER
6142@kindex --pic-veneer
6143The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6144ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6145is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6146@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6147
6148@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6149@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6150The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6151code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6152perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6153placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6154controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6155The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6156duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6157group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6158code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6159where they should be placed.
6160
6161The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6162@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6163placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6164branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6165placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6166value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6167exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6168A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6169linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6170from the input sections.
6171
6172The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6173@samp{N = +1}.
6174
1a51c1a4
NC
6175Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6176only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6177otherwise.
6178
36f63dca
NC
6179@ifclear GENERIC
6180@lowersections
6181@end ifclear
6182@end ifset
6183
6184@ifset HPPA
6185@ifclear GENERIC
6186@raisesections
6187@end ifclear
6188
6189@node HPPA ELF32
6190@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6191@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6192@kindex --multi-subspace
6193When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6194import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6195The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6196stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6197multiple sub-spaces.
6198
6199@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6200@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6201Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6202stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6203@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6204sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6205a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6206the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6207conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6208prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6209A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6210branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6211@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6212@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6213detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6214positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6215
6216Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6217single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6218create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6219large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6220
6221@ifclear GENERIC
6222@lowersections
6223@end ifclear
6224@end ifset
6225
7fb9f789
NC
6226@ifset M68K
6227@ifclear GENERIC
6228@raisesections
6229@end ifclear
6230
6231@node M68K
6232@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6233
6234@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6235@kindex --got=@var{type}
6236The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6237The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6238@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6239the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6240@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6241entries only at non-negative offsets.
6242@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6243entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6244support such GOTs.
6245@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6246output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6247file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6248files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6249
6250@ifclear GENERIC
6251@lowersections
6252@end ifclear
6253@end ifset
6254
36f63dca
NC
6255@ifset MMIX
6256@ifclear GENERIC
6257@raisesections
6258@end ifclear
6259
6260@node MMIX
6261@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6262For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6263@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6264understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6265can translate between the two formats.
6266
6267There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6268Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6269registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6270equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6271@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6272global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6273this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6274symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6275
7a2de473
HPN
6276Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6277@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6278The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6279of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6280
6281Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6282are left out from an mmo file.
6283
6284@ifclear GENERIC
6285@lowersections
6286@end ifclear
6287@end ifset
6288
6289@ifset MSP430
6290@ifclear GENERIC
6291@raisesections
6292@end ifclear
6293
6294@node MSP430
6295@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6296For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6297will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6298just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6299
6300@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6301The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6302
6303@table @code
6304@item @samp{.vectors}
6305Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6306
6307@item @samp{.bootloader}
6308Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6309in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6310
6311@item @samp{.infomem}
6312Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6313this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6314
c0065db7 6315@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6316This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6317in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6318
6319@item @samp{.noinit}
6320Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6321
c0065db7 6322The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6323@end table
6324
6325@ifclear GENERIC
6326@lowersections
6327@end ifclear
6328@end ifset
6329
2a60a7a8
AM
6330@ifset POWERPC
6331@ifclear GENERIC
6332@raisesections
6333@end ifclear
6334
6335@node PowerPC ELF32
6336@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6337@cindex PowerPC long branches
6338@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6339Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6340displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6341@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6342@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6343the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6344section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6345section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6346@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6347both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6348considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6349
6350@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6351@table @option
6352@cindex PowerPC PLT
6353@kindex --bss-plt
6354@item --bss-plt
6355Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6356generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6357the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6358writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6359@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6360PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6361compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6362BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6363
016687f8
AM
6364@kindex --secure-plt
6365@item --secure-plt
6366@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6367@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6368when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6369layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6370style BSS PLT.
6371
2a60a7a8
AM
6372@cindex PowerPC GOT
6373@kindex --sdata-got
6374@item --sdata-got
6375The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6376sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6377@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6378section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6379@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6380@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6381@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6382@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6383PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6384pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6385GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6386really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6387
6388@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6389@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6390@item --emit-stub-syms
6391This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6392symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6393
6394@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6395@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6396@item --no-tls-optimize
6397PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6398sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6399disable the optimization.
6400@end table
6401
6402@ifclear GENERIC
6403@lowersections
6404@end ifclear
6405@end ifset
6406
6407@ifset POWERPC64
6408@ifclear GENERIC
6409@raisesections
6410@end ifclear
6411
6412@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6413@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6414
6415@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6416@table @option
6417@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6418@kindex --stub-group-size
6419@item --stub-group-size
6420Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6421by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6422@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6423sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6424a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6425the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6426conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6427prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6428A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6429branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6430@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6431@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6432detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6433positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6434
6435Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6436single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6437create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6438large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6439
6440@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6441@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6442@item --emit-stub-syms
6443This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6444symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6445
6446@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6447@kindex --dotsyms
6448@kindex --no-dotsyms
6449@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6450These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6451in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6452function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6453code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6454properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6455to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6456@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6457dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6458feature.
6459
6460@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6461@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6462@item --no-tls-optimize
6463PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6464sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6465disable the optimization.
6466
6467@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6468@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6469@item --no-opd-optimize
6470PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6471corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6472the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6473Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6474
6475@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6476@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6477@item --non-overlapping-opd
6478Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6479@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6480the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6481entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6482
6483@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6484@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6485@item --no-toc-optimize
6486PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6487entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6488reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6489marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6490marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6491relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6492unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6493reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6494discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6495reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6496code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6497optimization.
6498
6499@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6500@kindex --no-multi-toc
6501@item --no-multi-toc
6502By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6503entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6504total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6505grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6506TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6507calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6508help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
650964K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6510Use this option to turn off this feature.
6511@end table
6512
6513@ifclear GENERIC
6514@lowersections
6515@end ifclear
6516@end ifset
6517
49fa1e15
AM
6518@ifset SPU
6519@ifclear GENERIC
6520@raisesections
6521@end ifclear
6522
6523@node SPU ELF
6524@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6525
6526@cindex SPU ELF options
6527@table @option
6528
6529@cindex SPU plugins
6530@kindex --plugin
6531@item --plugin
6532This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6533
6534@cindex SPU overlays
6535@kindex --no-overlays
6536@item --no-overlays
6537Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6538regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6539@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6540turns off all this special overlay handling.
6541
6542@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6543@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6544@item --emit-stub-syms
6545This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6546symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6547
6548@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6549@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6550@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6551This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6552function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6553on calls to non-overlay regions.
6554
6555@cindex SPU local store size
6556@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6557@item --local-store=lo:hi
6558@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6559the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6560range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6561
c0065db7 6562@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6563@kindex --stack-analysis
6564@item --stack-analysis
6565SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6566unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6567under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6568@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6569@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6570determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6571for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6572for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6573for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6574find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6575and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6576under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6577dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6578is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6579and calls will be given.
6580
c0065db7 6581@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6582@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6583@item --emit-stack-syms
6584This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6585in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6586These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6587functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6588functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6589such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6590The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6591@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6592@end table
6593
6594@ifclear GENERIC
6595@lowersections
6596@end ifclear
6597@end ifset
6598
36f63dca
NC
6599@ifset TICOFF
6600@ifclear GENERIC
6601@raisesections
6602@end ifclear
6603
6604@node TI COFF
6605@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6606@cindex TI COFF versions
6607@kindex --format=@var{version}
6608The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6609TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6610also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6611format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6612header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6613
6614@ifclear GENERIC
6615@lowersections
6616@end ifclear
6617@end ifset
6618
2ca22b03
NC
6619@ifset WIN32
6620@ifclear GENERIC
6621@raisesections
6622@end ifclear
6623
6624@node WIN32
6625@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6626
c0065db7 6627This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6628See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6629command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6630
6631@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6632@cindex import libraries
6633@item import libraries
69da35b5 6634The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6635libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6636regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6637archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6638support for creating such libraries provided with the
6639@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6640
c0065db7
RM
6641@item exporting DLL symbols
6642@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6643The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6644
6645@table @emph
6646@item using auto-export functionality
6647@cindex using auto-export functionality
6648By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6649which is controlled by the following command line options:
6650
0a5d968e
NC
6651@itemize
6652@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6653@item --exclude-symbols
6654@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6655@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6656@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6657@end itemize
6658
09e2aba4
DK
6659When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6660(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6661symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6662often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6663private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6664options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6665exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6666final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6667
6668If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6669command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6670if either of the following are true:
6671
6672@itemize
6673@item A DEF file is used.
6674@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6675@end itemize
dc8465bf 6676
c0065db7
RM
6677@item using a DEF file
6678@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6679Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6680an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6681exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6682name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6683command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6684
6685@example
6686gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6687@end example
6688
0a5d968e
NC
6689Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6690@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6691
dc8465bf
NC
6692Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6693
6694@example
4b5bd4e7 6695LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6696
6697EXPORTS
6698foo
6699bar
6700_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6701another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6702var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
6703doo = foo == foo2
6704eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 6705@end example
dc8465bf 6706
7fcab871 6707This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
6708symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6709alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6710by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6711@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
6712@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
6713export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
6714in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
6715symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 6716
6b31ad16
DS
6717The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6718name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6719the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6720
b45619c0
NC
6721When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6722library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6723@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6724executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6725
6726With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6727specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6728non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6729
6730If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6731or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6732filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6733
4b5bd4e7
DS
6734The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6735
6736@example
6737EXPORTS
6738 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6739 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 6740 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 6741@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6742
6743Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6744@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6745@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6746@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6747Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
6748@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
6749string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
6750
6751The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6752
6753@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6754will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6755by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6756linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6757library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6758
6759@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6760The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6761the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6762@code{*_imp__foo}).
6763
6764@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6765well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6766read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6767variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6768the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6769extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6770application will behave unexpectedly.
6771
6772@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6773it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6774symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6775API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6776the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6777
4b5bd4e7
DS
6778See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6779other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6780
6781@cindex creating a DEF file
6782While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6783with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6784
6785@item Using decorations
6786@cindex Using decorations
6787Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6788itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6789declared as:
6790
6791@example
6792__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6793__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6794@end example
6795
6796All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6797any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6798this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6799the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6800
6801Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6802decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6803instead:
6804
6805@example
6806__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6807__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6808@end example
6809
c0065db7
RM
6810This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6811when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6812variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6813code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6814of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6815omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6816@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6817information.
c0065db7 6818@end table
dc8465bf 6819
2ca22b03
NC
6820@cindex automatic data imports
6821@item automatic data imports
6822The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6823by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6824compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6825issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6826code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6827c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6828initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6829decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6830platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6831command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6832The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6833suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6834trigger the feature's use.
6835
c0065db7 6836auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6837additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6838
c0065db7 6839"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6840documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6841
c0065db7
RM
6842The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6843occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6844One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6845below.
6846
6847@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6848For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6849object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6850offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6851field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6852in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6853without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6854The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6855references.
6856
c0065db7
RM
6857The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6858be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6859themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6860runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6861compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6862support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6863run without error on an older system.
6864
c0065db7
RM
6865@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6866enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6867
6868@cindex direct linking to a dll
6869@item direct linking to a dll
6870The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6871including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6872libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6873traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6874libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6875function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6876though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6877storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6878tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6879large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6880
c0065db7 6881Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6882@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6883of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
6884perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6885select the dll instead of an import library.
6886
2ca22b03 6887
69da35b5
NC
6888For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6889to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
6890
6891@example
45e948fe
NC
6892libxxx.dll.a
6893xxx.dll.a
6894libxxx.a
6895xxx.lib
69da35b5 6896cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
6897libxxx.dll
6898xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
6899@end example
6900
69da35b5
NC
6901before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6902
c0065db7
RM
6903(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6904where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6905@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6906file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
6907@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6908
c0065db7
RM
6909Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6910@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
6911was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6912various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6913could coexist on the same machine.
6914
2ca22b03
NC
6915The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6916applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 6917libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
6918
6919@example
6920bin/
6921 cygxxx.dll
6922lib/
6923 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 6924 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
6925@end example
6926
c0065db7
RM
6927Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6928done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
6929
69301. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6931@example
6932gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6933@end example
2ca22b03 6934
69da35b5
NC
6935However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6936(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6937@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6938not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6939
2ca22b03
NC
69402. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6941directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6942should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6943making the app/dll.
6944
6945@example
6946ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 6947@end example
2ca22b03
NC
6948
6949Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6950
6951@example
6952gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6953@end example
69da35b5
NC
6954
6955This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6956perfectly legal
6957
6958@example
6959bin/
6960 cygxxx-5.dll
6961lib/
c0065db7 6962 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
6963@end example
6964
dc8465bf 6965Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
6966even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6967@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6968
6969Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 6970wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
6971
69721. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6973work with auto-imported data.
6974
dc8465bf
NC
69752. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6976import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6977symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6978for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6979possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 6980
45e948fe
NC
69813. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6982critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6983in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6984stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6985
69da35b5 6986So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
6987true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6988a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6989binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
6990massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6991requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6992will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 6993
c0065db7 6994@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 6995@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6996@item adding additional names
6997Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
6998A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6999exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7000when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7001import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7002
c0065db7 7003@example
dc8465bf
NC
7004LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7005
7006EXPORTS
c0065db7 7007foo
dc8465bf 7008_foo = foo
c0065db7 7009@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7010
7011The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7012
7013Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7014source code using the "weak" attribute:
7015
c0065db7
RM
7016@example
7017void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7018void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7019@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7020
7021See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7022symbols.
7023
7024@item renaming symbols
7025Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7026kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7027@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7028DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7029created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7030
c0065db7 7031@example
dc8465bf
NC
7032LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7033
7034EXPORTS
7035_foo = foo
c0065db7 7036@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7037
7038The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7039@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7040@end table
dc8465bf 7041
0a5d968e 7042Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7043unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7044If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7045@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7046that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7047@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7048renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7049to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7050the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7051In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7052which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7053
7054@cindex weak externals
7055@item weak externals
7056The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7057weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7058defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7059are three variants of weak externals:
7060@itemize
7061@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7062called lazy externals.
7063@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7064This form is not presently implemented.
7065@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7066implemented.
7067@end itemize
7068As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7069are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7070uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7071
7072@cindex aligned common symbols
7073@item aligned common symbols
7074As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7075desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7076the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7077carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7078by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7079tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7080but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7081warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7082@end table
7083
7084@ifclear GENERIC
7085@lowersections
7086@end ifclear
7087@end ifset
7088
e0001a05
NC
7089@ifset XTENSA
7090@ifclear GENERIC
7091@raisesections
7092@end ifclear
7093
7094@node Xtensa
7095@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7096
7097@cindex Xtensa processors
7098The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7099@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7100specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7101keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7102example, with the command:
7103
7104@smallexample
7105SECTIONS
7106@{
7107 .text : @{
7108 *(.literal .text)
7109 @}
7110@}
7111@end smallexample
7112
7113@noindent
7114@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7115and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7116literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7117interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7118group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7119files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7120and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7121
43cd72b9 7122@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7123@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7124Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7125provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7126is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7127literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7128will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7129location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7130the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7131unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7132@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7133range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7134
7135For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7136to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7137instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7138instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7139instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7140@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7141hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7142By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7143switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7144density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7145instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7146performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7147linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7148a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7149
7150The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7151control the linker:
7152
7153@cindex Xtensa options
7154@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7155@item --size-opt
7156When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7157more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7158no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7159alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7160preserve the correctness of the code.
7161@end table
e0001a05
NC
7162
7163@ifclear GENERIC
7164@lowersections
7165@end ifclear
7166@end ifset
7167
252b5132
RH
7168@ifclear SingleFormat
7169@node BFD
7170@chapter BFD
7171
7172@cindex back end
7173@cindex object file management
7174@cindex object formats available
7175@kindex objdump -i
7176The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7177These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7178object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7179format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7180it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7181associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7182object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7183(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7184list all the formats available for your configuration.
7185
7186@cindex BFD requirements
7187@cindex requirements for BFD
7188As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7189several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7190BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7191formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7192been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7193BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7194may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7195
7196One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7197mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7198useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7199conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7200
7201@menu
7202* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7203@end menu
7204
7205@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7206@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7207@cindex opening object files
7208@include bfdsumm.texi
7209@end ifclear
7210
7211@node Reporting Bugs
7212@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7213@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7214@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7215
ff5dcc92 7216Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7217
7218Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7219it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7220to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7221work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7222@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7223
7224In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7225information that enables us to fix the bug.
7226
7227@menu
7228* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7229* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7230@end menu
7231
7232@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7233@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7234@cindex bug criteria
7235
7236If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7237
7238@itemize @bullet
7239@cindex fatal signal
7240@cindex linker crash
7241@cindex crash of linker
7242@item
7243If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7244@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7245
7246@cindex error on valid input
7247@item
ff5dcc92 7248If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7249
7250@cindex invalid input
7251@item
ff5dcc92 7252If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7253may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7254object files are correct.
7255
7256@item
7257If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7258improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7259@end itemize
7260
7261@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7262@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7263@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7264@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7265
7266A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7267products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7268recommend you contact that organization first.
7269
7270You can find contact information for many support companies and
7271individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7272distribution.
7273
ad22bfe8 7274@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7275Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7276@value{BUGURL}.
7277@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7278
7279The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7280@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7281fact or leave it out, state it!
7282
7283Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7284problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7285assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7286matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7287the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7288location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7289were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7290into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7291specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7292and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7293
7294Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7295the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7296on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7297
7298Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7299bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7300respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7301You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7302
7303To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7304
7305@itemize @bullet
7306@item
ff5dcc92 7307The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7308the @samp{--version} argument.
7309
7310Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7311the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7312
7313@item
ff5dcc92 7314Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7315patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7316
7317@item
7318The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7319version number.
7320
7321@item
ff5dcc92 7322What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7323``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7324
7325@item
7326The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7327observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7328list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7329sufficient.
7330
7331If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7332and then we might not encounter the bug.
7333
7334@item
7335A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7336bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7337provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7338bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7339state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7340requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7341we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7342attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7343
7344If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7345@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7346object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7347@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7348how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7349
7350@item
7351A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7352incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7353
ff5dcc92 7354Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7355will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7356not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7357a chance to make a mistake.
7358
7359Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7360say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7361copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7362C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7363and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7364fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7365you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7366any conclusion from our observations.
7367
7368@item
ff5dcc92 7369If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7370diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7371@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7372If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7373context, not by line number.
7374
7375The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7376sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7377@end itemize
7378
7379Here are some things that are not necessary:
7380
7381@itemize @bullet
7382@item
7383A description of the envelope of the bug.
7384
7385Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7386which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7387changes will not affect it.
7388
7389This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7390will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7391with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7392We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7393
7394Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7395of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7396output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7397less time, and so on.
7398
7399However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7400report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7401
7402@item
7403A patch for the bug.
7404
7405A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7406the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7407a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7408to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7409
ff5dcc92 7410Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7411construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7412through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7413able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7414fixed.
7415
7416And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7417patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7418help us to understand.
7419
7420@item
7421A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7422
7423Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7424things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7425@end itemize
7426
7427@node MRI
7428@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7429@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7430To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7431linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7432alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7433described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7434simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7435@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7436linker commands; these commands are described here.
7437
7438In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7439file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7440features to make use of them.
7441
7442You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7443@samp{-c} command-line option.
7444
7445Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7446command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7447blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7448MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7449issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7450
7451Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7452
7453You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7454lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7455The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7456
7457@table @code
7458@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7459@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7460@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7461Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7462the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7463@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7464your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7465script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7466commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7467input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7468@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7469
7470@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7471@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7472Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7473in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7474
7475@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7476
7477@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7478@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7479Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7480@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7481
7482@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7483@item BASE @var{expression}
7484Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7485absolute addresses) in the output file.
7486
7487@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7488@item CHIP @var{expression}
7489@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7490This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7491
7492@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7493@item END
7494This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7495
7496@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7497@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7498Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7499language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7500
7501@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7502@item
252b5132
RH
7503S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7504
7505@item
7506IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7507
7508@item
7509COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7510@samp{COFF}
7511@end enumerate
7512
7513@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7514@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7515Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7516@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7517
7518The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7519same line, with no change in its effect.
7520
7521@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7522@item LOAD @var{filename}
7523@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7524Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7525same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7526command line.
7527
7528@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7529@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7530@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7531MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7532option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7533
7534@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7535@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7536@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7537Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7538order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7539script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7540sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7541file, in the order specified.
7542
7543@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7544@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7545@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7546@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7547Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7548@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7549
7550@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7551@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7552@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7553@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7554You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7555specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7556If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7557@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7558@end table
7559
793c5807
NC
7560@node GNU Free Documentation License
7561@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7562@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7563
370b66a1
CD
7564@node LD Index
7565@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7566
7567@printindex cp
7568
7569@tex
7570% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7571% meantime:
7572\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7573\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7574\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7575\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7576\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7577\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7578\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7579\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7580\page\colophon
7581% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7582@end tex
7583
252b5132 7584@bye
This page took 0.921901 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.